XUV300 Owners Manual PDF

Owner’s Manual
W4/W6/W8/W8(O)
______________________________________________________________________________________
Issue Date: February 2019
N O T E : Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided in this manual, and keep it in a safe place for future reference. If you have any
doubt whatsoever regarding the use or care of your vehicle, please visit your Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance or advice.
This Owner's Manual should be considered as an integral part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle.
__________________________________________________________________________________
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD., GATEWAY BUILDING, APOLLO BUNDER, MUMBAI - 400 039
www.mahindra.com
Table of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................ 1-1 Front Overview........................................................................ 3-1

Introduction............................................................................. 1-1 Rear Overview......................................................................... 3-2
Safety Symbols ....................................................................... 1-2 Instrument Panel Overview ................................................ 3-3
General Safety Information and Instructions .................. 1-2 4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW.......................................... 4-1
To Owners of a Mahindra Vehicle...................................... 1-4 Warning Lamps Overview.................................................... 4-2
Audio/Infotainment Manual .............................................. 1-6 Warning Lamps ..................................................................... 4-4
2 GENERAL .......................................................................................... 2-1 5 SEATS AND SEAT BELTS .............................................................. 5-1
Feature Matrix........................................................................ 2-1 Front Seats ............................................................................. 5-1
Lubricants & Fuel Recommendation Chart - Petrol ...... 2-6 Head Restraint ....................................................................... 5-3
Lubricants & Fuel Recommendation Chart - Diesel ...... 2-7 Passenger Seat...................................................................... 5-4
Dimensions.............................................................................. 2-8 Rear Seat ............................................................................... 5-5
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)................................... 2-9 Seat Belts ................................................................................ 5-9
Engine Number ..................................................................... 2-9 Infant and Child Safety ....................................................... 5-15
Bulb Specification ............................................................... 2-10 6 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ........................ 6-1
Fuses & Relays.................................................................... 2-11 Airbags ..................................................................................... 6-1
Changing a Flat Tyre .......................................................... 2-16 Front Airbags.......................................................................... 6-3
Jack Points........................................................................... 2-20 Seat Side Airbag and Curtain Airbag (if equipped)......... 6-4
Technical Specifications .................................................... 2-25 Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch ................................... 6-5
3 OVERVIEW........................................................................................ 3-1 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp ..................................... 6-5
Table of Contents
Airbag Inflation/Deployment .............................................. 6-6 Theft Detent Warning System......................................... 7-24

Child Restraint and Airbag .................................................. 6-8 Engine Immobiliser System .............................................. 7-24
Airbag Deployment ............................................................... 6-9 8 FEATURES AND CONTROL........................................................... 8-1
Airbag Non-deployment........................................................ 6-9 Quadruple Switch................................................................... 8-1
Airbag Replacement .......................................................... 6-12 Mirrors..................................................................................... 8-4
Self Removing SRS Related Parts .................................. 6-12 Interior Rearview Mirror (IRVM) ........................................ 8-5
Airbag Disposal ................................................................... 6-12 Storage Compartments....................................................... 8-7
Airbag Repair....................................................................... 6-12 Sun Visor .............................................................................. 8-16
Airbag Maintenance........................................................... 6-12 Horn ....................................................................................... 8-17
7 LOCKS AND KEYS .......................................................................... 7-1 Sunroof (if equipped) .......................................................... 8-18
Doors........................................................................................ 7-2 Interior Lamps..................................................................... 8-23
Tailgate Safety Release Lever............................................. 7-4 Microphone.......................................................................... 8-25
Central Locking System........................................................ 7-5 Power Outlet (12V) ............................................................ 8-25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System (if equipped)......... 7-7 AUX and USB Ports ........................................................... 8-27
Smart Key System/Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) (if Exterior Lamps .................................................................... 8-27
equipped) .............................................................................. 7-12 Windshield Wipers............................................................. 8-36
If Smart Key is Lost ............................................................ 7-22 Engine Stop/Start System (ESS) .................................... 8-40
Battery Replacement for Remote Key/Smart 9 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES .......................................... 9-1
Key.......................................................................................... 7-23 Tachometer ............................................................................ 9-2
Table of Contents
Speedometer .......................................................................... 9-2 Smart Key Alerts ................................................................ 9-19

Odometer................................................................................. 9-3 Steering Lock Alerts (for W8/W8 (O) only) ................ 9-19
Trip Meter ............................................................................... 9-3 Door Open Alerts ................................................................ 9-20
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge................................. 9-3 Functional Safety Alert ...................................................... 9-21
Fuel Level Gauge .................................................................... 9-4 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument
W8/W8(O) Instrument Cluster screen flow.................. 9-5 Cluster................................................................................... 9-22
W4/W6 instrument cluster screen flow........................ 9-6 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster .................. 9-24
Clock Screens (if equipped) ................................................. 9-7 10 PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM........................................................ 10-1
Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped) ................... 9-7 Front/Rear Obstacle Detection System (if
Drive Information (if equipped)............................................ 9-8 equipped) .............................................................................. 10-1
Gear Recommendation ....................................................... 9-9 Parking Assistance System (PAS) – RPAS & FPAS (If
Fuel Computer........................................................................ 9-9 equipped) .............................................................................. 10-2
Digital Speedo Meter (if equipped) ................................. 9-10 PAS (RPAS & FPAS) Information on Instrument
Cluster Setting (if equipped) ............................................. 9-11 Cluster Screen .................................................................... 10-3
Mood Lighting (if equipped) .............................................. 9-13 Operation of PAS ................................................................ 10-4
Vehicle Condition Related Warning (W8/W8 (O) Pay Attention ....................................................................... 10-5
only)........................................................................................ 9-14 Limitations of PAS .............................................................. 10-7
Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)................... 9-17 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) – Type 1
Steering Mode Control Alerts.......................................... 9-18 (if equipped).......................................................................... 10-8
Table of Contents
Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) - Type-2 13 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(if equipped)........................................................................10-10 (HVAC)............................................................................................ 13-1
11 REAR VIEW CAMERA (RVC) (if equipped).............................. 11-1 HVAC Overview.................................................................... 13-2
Feature Description ........................................................... 11-1 Dual Zone Automatic Heater and A/C (if
Screen View Selection ....................................................... 11-8 equipped) .............................................................................. 13-4
Entry and Exit Conditions................................................... 11-8 Manual Temperature Control (MTC) ...........................13-12
Camera Maintenance........................................................ 11-9 Defogging/Defrosting .....................................................13-17
System Limitations ............................................................. 11-9 Replacing Air Conditioner Filter.....................................13-19
12 STEERING AND BRAKES............................................................ 12-1 14 STARTING AND DRIVING THE VEHICLE ................................. 14-1
Steering................................................................................. 12-1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle.................... 14-1
Steering Mode Control Switch......................................... 12-3 Starting the Engine............................................................. 14-2
Steering Controls - Audio (if equipped) .......................... 12-4 Stopping the Engine ........................................................... 14-3
Brakes ................................................................................... 12-5 Exhaust Gases ..................................................................... 14-4
Hazard Activation Upon Crash ........................................ 12-7 Driving Your Vehicle ........................................................... 14-4
Vehicle Breakdown Warning ........................................... 12-7 Tips for Better Fuel Economy........................................... 14-8
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)......................................... 12-7 Ignition Switch (if equipped) .............................................. 14-9
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)(if Pedals..................................................................................14-10
equipped) .............................................................................. 12-8 Transmission .....................................................................14-11
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (if equipped) .......14-14
Table of Contents
Engine Idling .......................................................................14-15 Opening and Closing the Hood......................................... 17-4

Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................14-16 Engine Compartment......................................................... 17-6
Fuel.......................................................................................14-19 General Maintenance ........................................................ 17-8
15 WHEELS AND TYRES ................................................................. 15-1 In the Engine Compartment ............................................. 17-9
Tyre Information.................................................................. 15-1 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle ..................................17-13
Tyre Rating ........................................................................... 15-1 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle ...............................17-14
Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)............................................. 15-3 Battery.................................................................................17-14
Tyre Pressure...................................................................... 15-3 Wiper Blades.....................................................................17-15
Tyre Rotation Recommendations ................................... 15-6 Appearance Care and Protection.................................17-16
Tiretronics (if equipped) .................................................... 15-8 Air-Conditioning System Maintenance.........................17-20
16 EMERGENCIES.............................................................................. 16-1 Vehicle Storage .................................................................17-20
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................................ 16-1 Winter Care .......................................................................17-21
Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks ..................................... 16-1 Bulb Replacements ..........................................................17-22
Vehicle Overheating............................................................ 16-2 Projector Head Lamp (if equipped)...............................17-24
Jumpstarting ....................................................................... 16-3 Service Reminder Alert (if equipped) ...........................17-24
Limp Home Mode ............................................................... 16-7 Maintenance Schedule Chart (Petrol) .........................17-25
Towing ................................................................................... 16-7 Maintenance Schedule Chart (Diesel) .........................17-28
17 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 17-1
General Owner's Information ........................................... 17-1
INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIO NS
1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.1 Introduction
Dear Customer, Alternatively, you can contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer at:
Congratulations on purchasing M a h i n d r a X U V 3 0 0 . Your vehicle has • 1800-209-6006 (Toll free)
been designed to provide years of safe and dependable service, as • customercare@mahindra.com
long as it is used and maintained in accordance with the
instructions provided in this manual. We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring.
All persons who will use and/or maintain this vehicle must read, Sincerely,
understand and follow all warnings and instructions provided in this
manual. This Owner's Manual should be considered an integral part
of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle. However, nothing MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD
in this manual, and none of the safety devices installed in the
vehicle, are a substitute for careful operation and common sense.
Always make sure that your vehicle is in optimum working order,
and take note of the road and weather conditions under which you Servicing and Summary Data
are using your vehicle.
• For all issues concerning the vehicle and for any need of spare
If you have any questions concerning the proper use or parts, contact only the Authorised Mahindra Dealer network
maintenance of your vehicle, please call your Authorised Mahindra
• We recommend you always use genuine Mahindra spare parts
Dealer. A list of dealers can be found in the Dealer Directory
when performing repairs on the vehicle
Supplement.
• We suggest that you record the vehicle data in the W a r r a n t y a n d
I n f o r m a t i o n G u i d e for future references
© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 1-1

INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.2 Safety Symbols particular attention must be paid for optimum use of the
vehicle.
Carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/
instructions given in this manual. If you see this symbol, it indicates “no,” “do not,” “do not do this,” or
“never”.
Legend of the Symbols
To emphasise information and procedures regarding safety, use,

maintenance, etc., the following symbols are used throughout the
manual:
1.3 General Safety Information and Instructions

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions provided in this
manual could result in failure of the vehicle, an accident and/or
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if serious personal injury.
not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. 1. Carefully read, understand and follow the warnings and
instructions given in this manual. This manual is an essential
part of the product. Keep it in the vehicle’s glove box for future
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if reference.
not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or 2. Please note that throughout this manual, reference is made
property damage. that “an accident” could occur. An accident could cause you or
a bystander to sustain personal injury, or result in property
damage.
NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle, 3. Never use a mobile phone or any device with headphone while
the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to which driving. This may take your focus off the road and lead to
accidents.
1-2 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

4. Please be advised that many service and repair tasks require have your vehicle regularly inspected by an Authorised
specialised knowledge, tools and experience. General Mahindra Dealer or a qualified mechanic. If the inspection
mechanical aptitude may not be sufficient to properly service reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace or
or repair your vehicle. If you have any doubt whatsoever have the component serviced.
regarding the ability to properly service or repair your vehicle, 11. We recommend that you use only genuine parts supplied by
please contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer or a qualified Mahindra. The use of non-Mahindra parts will not be covered
technician. by warranty.
5. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, 12. Never crawl under or be in close proximity to the vehicle when
frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, it is lifted off the ground (by a jack), unless the vehicle is
retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must properly supported with jack stands, wheel chocks and other
be replaced immediately. appropriate safety devices.
6. Always start and operate the engine in a well-ventilated area. If 13. Never attempt any repairs or adjustments to any component
in an enclosed area, vent the exhaust to the outside. Do not while the vehicle is in motion. Always switch off the engine, and
modify or tamper with the exhaust system. wait for the engine to come to a complete stop before
7. Examine tyres for excessive tread wear and uneven wear performing any repairs or adjustments.
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged 14. The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification
in the tread and check sidewalls for any cuts, cracks, or other reference, hence it is necessary to keep them in good
signs of wear. Replace as necessary. condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them.
8. Always maintain the safety labels affixed to your vehicle in a The customer is responsible for any possible tampering with
good legible condition. the plates, which will immediately void the warranty.
9. All signal lamps, buzzers, shields, guards and other protective 15. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt manoeuvres, or other
safety devices must always remain in place and in good, proper unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.
working condition. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed,
especially when turning. Note that the centre of gravity of the
10. The lifespan of Mahindra products depend on many factors. vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if
Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise luggage is mounted on the roof carrier.
the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its lifespan.
The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please

1.4 To Owners of a Mahindra Vehicle this warning, use a handsfree system to ensure that the hands are
free to drive the vehicle. Even handsfree do not ensure that due to
When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-use, you may distraction an accident will not happen.
experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is a characteristic
of the tyres and should be no reason for concern. The condition Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of
should correct itself within 5-15 km. of driving. If the disturbance communication equipment in vehicles in your country.
persists, have the tyres checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer. Driving Long Distances
Driving and Alcohol
When you are driving over long distances, follow these tips so that
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired by alcohol even if the you have a safe journey:
blood alcohol level is far below the legal minimum. Drunken driving • Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely
is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
• Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different
parts of the road
Never drink and drive. Drinking and driving will lead to an • Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea
accident resulting in serious personal injury. • Relax and stay calm
Driving and Drugs/Medication • Take breaks at regular intervals
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of Protecting Our Environment
prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even cough
syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that All of us should play our part in protecting our environment.
it will not affect your driving ability. Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring hazardous waste disposal
(including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps
Mobile Phones Warning towards this initiative.
Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, computers, Mahindra vehicles conform to existing emission norms (standards).
portable radios or other by the driver while driving is dangerous. In Adhering to the periodical maintenance schedule and using
exceptional condition, if use of a mobile phone is necessary despite

Mahindra genuine parts will help retain emission performance of To avoid counterfeit parts and to protect our brand image,
the vehicle and is a pre-requisite for emissions warranty coverage. Mahindra genuine parts are packed in a branded carton. Look for
the “Mahindra Genuine Parts” logo.
Servicing
If you have any questions concerning the proper use or

maintenance of your vehicle, please call your Authorised Mahindra
Dealer. A list of dealers can be found in the Dealer Directory
Supplement or on the Internet.
Any unauthorised modifications or alterations to this vehicle or
Alternatively, you can contact us on 1800-209-6006 /
customercare@mahindra.com.
failure to use appropriate specification and quality spare parts
could seriously affect vehicle roadworthiness and safety leading
Running-in to an accident, resulting in serious injury.
Driving smoothly during first 1,000 km. will help to prevent Mahindra Genuine Accessories
abnormal and premature system wear. Proper running-in will
improve the life of drivetrain and vehicle components. A wide selection of quality accessories are available through your
Authorised Mahindra Dealer. These accessories have been
A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1,000 km. of specifically engineered to allow you to personalise your vehicle to
running. This should be considered as a normal part of break-in and suit your requirements and complement its style and aerodynamic
not interpreted as any problem with the engine. appearance.
Mahindra Genuine Parts Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets
Mahindra's rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every
Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles. Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra
installation provisions comes with the respective accessory
In the event that any part needs replacement, we recommend that
warranty.
you use only Mahindra genuine parts.
Consult your Authorised Mahindra Dealer for detailed information
Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and will not be
about accessories available for your specific model variant.
covered by your Mahindra warranty.

Vehicle Safety
For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations, When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
always keep the following information in mind: • Always remove the ignition key when you park the vehicle
• The company does not take any responsibility for • Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors
consequential damages / injuries resulting due to fitment of
unauthorised aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / • Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave
cutting wires in the wiring harness something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the
doors
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and
luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult 1.5 Audio/Infotainment Manual
Authorised Mahindra Dealer for specific weight information
Please refer the user e-manual in infotainment for details regarding:
• Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended
• Audio/Video functions (if equipped)
• Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like
wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the performance of • Bluetooth functions
safety systems
• Navigation (if equipped)
• Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios,
• Handsfree usage
telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio
transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with • Ecosense (if equipped)
the local regulations and should be installed only by your
Authorised Mahindra Dealer • Android Auto (if equipped)
• Car Play (if equipped)

GENERAL
2 GENERAL the vehicle in the standard form. Please be aware that this
manual may apply to various models/variants. As a result you
2.1 Feature Matrix may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your
vehicle. All the information, illustration, and specifications in this
manual are based on the latest product information available at
the time of publication.
In view of the policy of continuously improving our products, we We recommend you to contact the nearest Authorised
reserve the right to alter specifications or designs without prior Mahindra Dealer for latest features applicable to your vehicle.
notice and without liability/obligation. Illustrations do not show
FEATURE W4 W6 W8 W8(O)
TECHNOLOGY
Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start) � �
Projector Head Lamps � �
Day Time Running Lamp (DRL) � �
18 cm (7”) Colour Touch Screen Infotainment Display with GPS, USB (Audio /
Video), Bluetooth with Navigation, GPS Antenna and Inbuilt Compass � � �
10 cm (4") Monochrome Infotainment Display with USB, Bluetooth with Basic Only for Diesel
Audio Feature
Infotainment System (with Carplay and Android Auto) � �
Tiretronics �
Reverse Park Assist System � �
Rear View Camera � �
Front Park Assist System �
Auto Rain & Light Sensing Wipers � �

GENERAL
Intermittent Rear Wipers � �
Intelligent Light Sensing Head Lamps � �
Digital Immobiliser � � � �
Digital Trip and Tachometer � � � �
SMS Read Out � �
Voice Recognition System � �
Tweeter � �
Ecosense � � �
Mahindra Bluesense App � � � �
Electric Sunroof with Anti-Pinch �
Push-Button Start/Stop � �
Theft Detent Warning System with Burgler alarm � �
COMFORT
Steering Wheel-Leather � �
Gear Shift Knob-Leather � �
Steering Mode Control (Normal, Comfort & Sports) � � � �
HVAC (Manual) with Electrically operated temperature control � �
HVAC with Dual zone Automatic temperature control � �
Premium Fabric Seats � �
Fabric Seats �
Rear Seat Split (60/40) �
� � �

GENERAL
Artificial Leather Upholstery �
Power-Foldable ORVM’s with Intergrated Indicator � �
Power-Adjustable ORVM’s � �
IRVM (Day/Night) � � �
IRVM (Auto Dimming) �
Adjustable Driver's Seat (with Height Adjuster) � �
Seat Belts (Pre-Tensioner + Load Limiter) � � � �
Seat Belts (Anchor Pre-Tensioner) � �
Height Adjustable Seat Belts (Front Row) � � � �
Sun Visor with Mirror & Illumination � �
STYLE
Supervision Cluster with Multi Colour Theme � �
Alloy Wheels �
Diamond Cut Alloy Wheels �
Spare Wheel R16” (Steel) R16 “(Steel) R17” (Steel) R17” (Steel)
Full Wheel Caps �
Auto Light Control System � �
Front Fog Lamps � �
Rear Fog Lamps � �
High Mounted Stop Lamp � In Spoiler In Spoiler In Spoiler
Soft feel Soft feel
Dashboard and Door Trims Non Painted Non Painted
Painted Painted

GENERAL
2nd Row Armrest with Cupholder � �
CONVENIENCE
Steering Mounted Cruise Controls � �
Steering Mounted Phone and Audio Controls � � �
Power Windows � � � �
Power Windows with Driver Side Express Up/Down with Anti-Pinch � �
Power Windows with Driver Side Express Down � �
Extended Power Window � � � �
Flip Key (Remote Key Entry) �
Smart Key � �
Key Illumination � �
Tinted Solar-Reflecting Glass � � � �
12V Accessory Socket � � � �
USB Port for Charging � � � �
USB Port for Infotainment connectivity � �
Rear Wash and Wipe � �
Rear De-Mister � �
Follow-Me-Home Head Lamps � � �
Lead-Me-To-Vehicle Lamps � � �
Roof Lamps Rear Only Rear Only Front and Rear Front and Rear
Door Ajar Lamps � �
Bottle Holder � � � �

GENERAL
Glove Box with Illumination lamp � �
SAFETY
Airbags (Driver + Passenger) � � � �
Knee Airbag (Driver) �
Seat Airbag & Curtain Airbags �
Front Seats Front Seats Front Seats Front and Rear
Seat Belt Reminder for Passenger Seats
Only Only Only Seats
Speed Sensing Door Lock � � � �
Impact Sensing Door Unlock � � � �
Passenger Airbag Off Switch � � � �
ISOFIX Child Seat Mount � � � �
ABS with Electronic Brake-Force Distribution (EBD) � � � �
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) with Hill Hold and Brake Assist � �
Collapsible Steering and Side Intrusion Beams � � � �

GENERAL
2.2 Lubricants & Fuel Recommendation Chart - Petrol
Refilling
System Lubricant Specification Remarks
Capacity
Always use "MAXIMILE FEO" new generation
Mahindra genuine engine oil. This is specially
developed for your engine’s optimum
performance and fuel efficiency. In extreme cases
MAHINDRA "MAXIMILE FEO" Special Engine of emergency and non-availability of above oil, we
Engine Oil 4.0 litres suggest Engine Oil meeting minimum API SL SAE
NEW GENERATION GENUINE ENGINE OIL Fluid
15W-40 specification can be used and replaced
at 5,000 km. This alternate oil or other Brand will
not provide equivalent performance of above
Genuine oil
Brand Specific. Don’t use other coolants/water for top-up. In case of
MAHINDRA "MAXIMILE ULTRA emergency, coolant meeting JIS K-2234 specification should be used
Engine Cooling COOL" ~3.0 litres (30% concentration diluted with distilled water) and coolant change
(READY-TO–USE COOLANT. NO NEED TO MIX WATER)
period to be reduced to 30,000 km
In case of genuine oil non-availability, manual
transmission oil meeting API GL-4 SAE 80W-90
Special Manual specification is suggested. This alternate oil or
Transaxle Oil MAHINDRA "MAXIMILE SYNTEC F2" 1.75 litres Transmission
NEW GENERATION GENUINE TRANSMISSION OIL other brand may not provide equivalent
Fluid performance of recommended genuine oil. Drain
Interval should be reduced to 20000km.
If Maximile DOT 4 brake fluid is not available and in emergency
1.5 litres conditions, use Brake Fluid Meeting SAE J1703 FMVSS NO.116 DOT
Brake and Clutch MAHINDRA "MAXIMILE DOT 4" (including
GENUINE BRAKE FLUID 4 OR IS 8654 TYPE-2 Specification. Change it at 30,000 km or 2
bleeding) years whichever is earlier
Petrol fuel conforming to Indian
Recommended Fuel standard IS 2796; 2017 BS–IV 42 litres —
specification or equivalent

GENERAL
2.3 Lubricants & Fuel Recommendation Chart - Diesel
Refilling
System Lubricant Specification Remarks
Capacity
Always use "MAXIMILE FEO" new generation
Mahindra genuine engine oil. This is specially
developed for your engine’s optimum performance
and fuel efficiency. In extreme cases of emergency
MAHINDRA "MAXIMILE FEO" Special Engine and non-availability of above oil, we suggest Engine
Engine Oil 6.0 litres Oil meeting minimum API CH-4 SAE 15W-40
NEW GENERATION GENUINE ENGINE OIL Fluid
specification can be used and replaced at 10,000
km. This alternate oil or other Brand will not
provide equivalent performance of above Genuine
oil
Brand Specific. Don’t use other coolants/water for top-up. In case of
MAHINDRA "MAXIMILE ULTRA emergency, coolant meeting JIS K-2234 specification should be used
Engine Cooling COOL" ~3.0 litres (30% concentration diluted with distilled water) and coolant change
(READY-TO–USE COOLANT. NO NEED TO MIX WATER)
period to be reduced to 30,000 km
In case of genuine oil non-availability, manual
transmission oil meeting API GL-4 SAE 80W-90
Special Manual specification is suggested. This alternate oil or
Transaxle Oil MAHINDRA "MAXIMILE SYNTEC F2" 1.75 litres Transmission
NEW GENERATION GENUINE TRANSMISSION OIL other brand may not provide equivalent
Fluid performance of recommended genuine oil. Drain
Interval should be reduced to 20000km.
If Maximile DOT 4 brake fluid is not available and in emergency
1.5 litres conditions, use Brake Fluid Meeting SAE J1703 FMVSS NO.116 DOT
Brake and Clutch MAHINDRA "MAXIMILE DOT 4" (including
GENUINE BRAKE FLUID 4 OR IS 8654 TYPE-2 Specification. Change it at 30,000 km or 2
bleeding) years whichever is earlier
Diesel fuel conforming to Indian
Recommended Fuel standard IS 1460; 2017 BS–IV 42 litres —
specification or equivalent

GENERAL
2.4 Dimensions 2.4.2 Rear View
Dimension & Weights mm

Wheel Base 2600
Overall Length 3995
Overall Width 1821
Overall Height 1627
Track Width (Front) 1550
Track Width (Rear) 1563
2.4.1 Front View

2.4.3 Side View

GENERAL
2.5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2.6 Engine Number
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of your Diesel Petrol
vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped on the VIN
plate riveted on the floor under the driver seat of the vehicle. Flip
the cutout provided in the carpet to view the VIN plate.
Engine Number is punched on the engine crank case adjacent to

transaxle on the front side.
The engine number is also stamped on the VIN plate.

GENERAL
2.7 Bulb Specification
Lamp Bulb Wattage Bulb Type No. of Bulbs per Vehicle
Headlamp High version – High beam H1 55W 12V 55W 2
Headlamp High version – Low beam H7 55W 12V 55W 2
Headlamp Low version High/Low beam H4 55/60W 12V 55/60W 2
Front position lamp – High version LEDs
Front position lamp – Low version W5W 12V 5W 2
Turn signal lamp – Front P21W 12V 21W 2
Front Fog lamp H16 19W 12V 19W 2
Side Turn signal lamp – Low version WY5W 12V 5W 2
Stop lamp LEDs
Rear position lamp LEDs
Turn signal lamp – Rear WY16W 12V 16W 2
Reverse lamp W16W 12V 16W 2
Rear Fog lamp P21W 12V 21W 2

GENERAL
2.8 Fuses & Relays
A fuse is the most common electric protection device. A fuse is

placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds
the rating of the fuse, it blows off.
The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing
other components of the circuit from being damaged by the over
current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating.
Once a fuse blows off, it must be replaced with a new one.
Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before touching
or attempting to change a fuse.
The replacement fuse rating should be the same as the one you
are replacing.
You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All

fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller Fuse puller is available at the engine compartment fuse box.
should be used to remove the fuse from its position.

GENERAL
2.8.1 Engine Compartment Fuse Box Spare fuses are provided in the fuse box for replacement of blown
fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown
Engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle battery. fuse.
Fuse Layout :
To open the fuse box cover, press the lock and push the cover back
and lift it.

GENERAL
FUSES FUSES
FUSE NO. CIRCUIT FUSE RATING FUSE NO. CIRCUIT FUSE RATING
F1 HORN 15A F27 WP, WGV WP, WGV
F2 ENG ECU 15A F28 TAIL LH TAIL LH
F3 FUEL PUMP 20A F29 TAIL RH TAIL RH
F4 H/LAMP LO 20A F30 LFS LFS
F5 ABS 30A
RELAY NO. CIRCUIT RELAY TYPE/RATING
F6 WIPER 20A
R1 HEAD LAMP HI 12V 20A
F7 - -
R2 HORN 12V 20A
F8 DRL 10A R3 HVAC 12V 20A
F9 & 10 - - R4 WIPER HI 12V 20A 5P
F11 TCU 15A R5 START 12V 35A
F12 - - R6 COOLING FAN HI 12V 35A
F13 HVAC 10A R7 GNS 12V 20A
F14 RR DEMISTER 30A R8 HEAD LAMP LO 12V 20A
H/LAMP HI R9 FUEL PUMP 12V 20A
F15
R10 TAIL LAMP 12V 20A
F16 TAIL LAMP 15A R11 WIPER LO 12V 20A 5P
F17 GNS 15A R12 BLOWER 12V 35A
F18 to 20 - - R13 COOLING FAN LO 12V 35A
F21 H/LAMP LH H/LAMP LH R14 - -
F22 H/LAMP RH H/LAMP RH R15 ENGINE MAIN 40A 4P
R16 TAIL LAMP 12V 20A
INJECTOR, FUM&HFM INJECTOR, - -
F23 R17
FUM&HFM
R18 - -
F24 VVT-IN & OUT, VOP VVT-IN & OUT, VOP
R19 RR DEMISTER 12V 35A
F25 IGN COIL IGN COIL R20 - -
F26 ORVM ORVM

GENERAL
2.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Fuse Layout :
This fuse box is located below the Instrument panel on the driver
side. To access the fuse box, pull out the top panel as shown in the
image.

GENERAL
FUSES FUSES
FS NO. CIRCUIT FUSE RATING FS NO. CIRCUIT FUSE RATING
FS1 START 10A FS25 HAZARD,TURN SIGNAL LAMP 15A
FS2 INSIDE MIRROR 10A FS26 DOOR LOCK 15A
FS3 EPS, RVC, BCM, SMART KEY 10A FS27 - -
FS4 A/CON, HTR RLY, AUDIO 10A FS28 RR WIPER 10A
FS5 H/LAMP LEVELLING DEVICE 10A FS29 WASHER 10A
ABS/ESP FS30 to FS32 - -
FS6 10A
FS33 RR FOG 10A
FS7 TCU 10A
FS34 POWER WDW LH 25A
FS8 TCU, HVAC 10A
FS35 POWER WDW RH 25A
FS9 AUDIO 10A
FS36 FRT FOG LAMP 10A
OUT SIDE MIRROR, SMART
FS10 10A FS37 DRL 10A
KEY
FS11 & FS12 - - FS38 - -
FS13 ENG ECU 10A FS39 SUNROOF 20A
FS14 BUGLER ALARM HORN 10A *-SMART KEY OPTION
FS15 - -
MEMORY FUSE
FS16 BACK UP LAMP, PAS 10A
MEMORY FUSE
FS17 AIRBAG 10A PF NO. CIRCUIT
RATING
FS18 START * 15A PF1 AUDIO 15A
SMART KEY BUTTON,
FS19 10A ROOM LAMP, FOLDING, CLUSTER
DIAGNOSIS PF2 10A
MIRROR, HVAC, TPMS, MBFM
FS20 - -
FS21 DEFOGGER, BLOWER COIL 10A
FS22 BCM 10A
FS23 & FS24 - -

GENERAL
2.9 Changing a Flat Tyre
In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed gradually, Never place any part of your body under any portion of the
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be
well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away
the engine and turn ON your hazard warning flashers. from the vehicle.
Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you
vehicle on the side away from traffic. cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat tyre
and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic.
After changing a flat tyre, never store the tyre or other equipment
Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. Risk of in the passenger compartment of the vehicle.
being hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until you reach a
safe location. This loose equipment could strike an occupant in the event of a
sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper place.
Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is very
dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety equipment
and training.
The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for
changing a spare tyre. It is never to be used to perform any other
maintenance or repair on the vehicle.

GENERAL
The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre: Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the
traffic. When your safety is secured, contact your Authorised
Mahindra dealer for your emergency service
2.9.1 Warning Triangle
2.9.2 Tool Kit
The jack, Screwdriver (+and-), Jack operating Lever, Tow bar, Deo
Spanner(10mmx12mm) and Wheel Spanner are placed in the tool
kit organiser above the spare wheel.
The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.

It is placed in the luggage compartment below the luggage floor lid.
When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe place, set
up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Metres
behind, Night: 200 Metres behind)
A Jack D Tow Bar
When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving
B Screwdriver (+ and -) E Deo Spanner 10mm X 12mm
Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a
safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: C Jack Operating Lever F Wheel Spanner
100 Metres, Night: 200 Metres) to warn other vehicles

GENERAL
Jack is located on the tool kit organiser above the spare wheel. To • Lift and take out the tool kit organiser from the spare wheel
remove the jack out, follow the process below:
• Lift and take out the Luggage floor Lid as shown in the illustration
• Take the jack out from the tool kit organiser
2.9.3 Spare Wheel Removal
The spare wheel is mounted below the luggage compartment at the

rear end of the vehicle
• Lift the Luggage floor Lid and Tool kit organiser. (Refer Tool kit
removal procedure)

GENERAL
• Loosen the Lock nut from the Spare wheel
The spare tyre is only for emergency situations. Never use it for
normal driving. After installing the spare tyre on a wheel, take
your vehicle to a Mahindra Authorised Service Centre or a tyre-
specialised shop to replace it with a new regular tyre.
• When reinstalling the spare tyre, be sure to securely lock it

with lock nut.
• While your vehicle is being raised up with a jack, avoid any
• Lift the spare wheel upwards from inner side to vertical position impact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured
and take it out
• When taking out the spare tyre, be careful not to damage
the body of your vehicle
Luggage Floor Lid to be fitted always at the lower position when

removes and refits again.
Follow the reverse procedure to re– locate the flat tyre to the spare
wheel bracket.

GENERAL
2.9.4 Wheel Bolt Loosening the spanner does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts, but
loosen them by one or two turns.
Wheel cover Removal (if equipped)
Wrap the tip of a screw driver with cloth, insert it near the lugs of
the wheel cover and pry the cap away from the wheel. Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel
spanner while loosening/tightening the wheel bolts.
Do not try to pry off the wheel cover by hand alone. Take due 2.10 Jack Points
care in handling the wheel cover to avoid unexpected personal
injury. F r o n t j a c k u p p o i n t - On the side sill in-between the groove available
on the sill cladding just behind the front wheels.
Always loosen the wheel bolts before raising the vehicle. Turn the
wheel bolts counter clockwise to loosen as per the crisscross
sequence shown. To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the
bolt, so that the handle is on the left side. Grab the spanner near
the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that

GENERAL
R e a r j a c k u p p o i n t - On the side sill in-between the groove available

on the sill cladding just in front of the rear wheels.
A : Flat Tyre
B : Chock Blocks
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end along with the wheel
spanner into the jack and turn it clockwise with the jack handle. As
the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, check that it is
properly positioned. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can
be installed. Remember, you will need more ground clearance when
putting on the spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.
Make sure to instal the jack so that its upper plate is correctly
seated under the vehicle’s positions marked in the figure for the
flat tyre side.
2.10.1 Jacking
Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the jack is
positioned on a level and solid ground. Ensure no one is in the
vehicle.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the vehicle
from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising
wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the
rear wheels.

GENERAL
underbody of the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the Remove the wheel bolts. Lift the flat tyre straight off and place it
jack and cause personal injury. aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the
wheel with the holes on the hub. Lift up the wheel and get at least
• Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel the top bolt aligned through its hole. Wiggle the wheel and fix the
changing other bolts.
• Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle
Re-instal the wheel bolts inward and tighten by hand. Press the
• When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top or wheel inward and tighten the wheel bolts further.
underneath the jack
• Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change
the wheel
• Usable extended height of jack is up to the yellow line/mark
provided in the jack. Do not raise the jack above the yellow
line
• Follow jacking instructions
• Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by the jack
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by Never use oil or grease on the bolts . Doing so may lead to over
the jack alone. tightening of the bolts, wheel nut spanner slip, damage the bolts
and also may cause personal injuries. Also, bolts may loosen
and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious
accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt, clean before
installing.

GENERAL
Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the diagonally opposite When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body
wheel bolts using the wheel nut spanner. Turn the jack handle are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the
extension counter clockwise using the jack handle to lower the wheel bolts tightened with the torque spanner to 120 Nm, as
vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack soon as possible after changing wheels.
handle extension. Make sure the wheel spanner is securely
engaged over the bolt. Tighten each bolt a little at a time in the
diagonally opposite order as shown. Repeat the process until all the
bolts are tight. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage If you have rotated, repaired, changed your tyres or changed
other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. the wheel rims, check the wheel bolts are still tight after driving
about 1,000 km (Torque 120 Nm).
Put the wheel cap (if equipped) into position aligning the nozzle on
the wheel to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover. Tap it firmly
on the sides with your hand to snap it into place.
Check the air pressure of the replaced tyre. If the pressure is lower
than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and
inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is
correct. Always reinstal the valve cap after checking or adjusting
tyre pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dirt and moisture could get
into the valve core and cause air leakage. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and instal it as soon as possible.
Improperly or loosely tightened wheel bolts are dangerous. The

wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of
vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure
all the wheel bolts are properly/securely tightened to the
specified torque.

GENERAL
2.10.2 Restore the Tools, Jack and Flat Tyre Securely S t e e r i n g c e n t e r i n g c a l i b r a t i o n ( S t e e r i n g A n g l e S e n s o r ) to be

performed if you have done Wheel Alignment, repaired, changed
Mount the flat tyre to the spare wheel bracket at the luggage your tyres or changed the wheel rims. Contact an Authorised
compartment and firmly tighten the securing bolts. Restore the Mahindra Dealer for assistance.
tools and jack back to their respective locations.
The wheel balance and alignment differ from wheel to wheel

which may lead to difference in steering and braking. It is
recommended to fix the flat tyre at the nearest tyre shop and
swap the spare wheel back.
Wheel balancing and Wheel Alignment to be done after tyre

puncture rework.

GENERAL
2.11 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Diesel Petrol
ENGINE D15 1.5 Litre G12 1.2 Litre TCI MPFI
Displacement/Cubic Capacity 1497 cc 1197 cc
Type Transverse Transverse
Compression Ratio 16.0:1 9.5:1
Max. Engine output, (kW @ RPM) 85.8 kW @ 3750 rpm 81 kW @ 5000 rpm
Max. Torque (Nm @ RPM) 300 Nm @ 1500 - 2500 rpm 200 Nm @ 2000 - 3000 rpm
TRANSMISSION
Type Manual Transaxle
No. of Gears 6 Forward, 1 Reverse
GEAR RATIOS
I 4.154 4.154
II 2.300 2.174
III 1.464 1.464
IV 1.030 1.081
V 0.762 0.854
VI 0.659 0.705
Reverse 2.923 2.923
STEERING
Type/Description Electronic Power Steering (EPS)

GENERAL
Technical Specifications
Diesel Petrol
BRAKES
Service Brake Hydraulic Circuit Assisted by Vacuum Booster cross diagonal circuit with ABS
Front Disc
Rear Disc
Parking Brake Mechanical-Hand Operated
WHEELS & TYRES
6J x 16
Rim
6.5J x 17
P205/65 R16 95 H
Tyres
P215/55 R17 94 H
Type Radial Tubeless
Laden Tyre Pressure 32 Psi (for R16 tyre)
Front & Rear 34 Psi (for R17 tyre)
FUEL
Fuel Capacity 42
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage 12V
Battery 60Ah / 50Ah

OVERVIEW
3 OVERVIEW
3.1 Front Overview
A Side repeater*
B Outside Rearview Mirror (ORVM)
C Front Windshield
D Front Wiper
E Hood
F Headlamp (Low beam)
G Turn Signal Lamp
H Fog Lamp*
I Head Lamp High Beam
* if equipped

OVERVIEW
3.2 Rear Overview
A Rear Turn Indicator

B Rear Windshield / Demister*
C Roof Antenna*
D High Mounted Stop Lamp
E Rear Wiper*
F Rear Parking Lamps
G Reverse Lamp
H Brake/Park Lamp
I Rear Camera*
J Rear Fog Lamp*
* if equipped

OVERVIEW
3.3 Instrument Panel Overview Accelerator/Brake/Clutch

A Centre Storage M
Pedal
B Side Vents N Front Storage
C Side Defrost Vents O Parking Brake
D Front Co-passenger Airbag P Console Storage
E Infotainment Screen* Q Cup Holder
F Centre Vents R Power Outlet
G Wiper Control Stalk S Gear Lever
H Steering Wheel T AUX/USB Ports*
I Steering Controls* U HVAC Control
J Instrument Cluster V Glove Box
K Horn Pad/Driver Airbag W Hazard Switch
ECO / Head Lamp Levelling

L
Switches
* if equipped

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW
4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW

W8/W8 (O) W4/W6
A Tachometer G Odometer
B Tripmeter H Temperature Gauge
C Telltales I Steering Mode Control
D Gear Shift Indicator J TDMS*
E Speedometer K Door Alert
F Fuel Gauge * if equipped

4.1 Warning Lamps Overview

Low Engine
Water-in-Fuel Seat Belt
Left Turn ESP OFF Oil Pressure
Warning Parking Lamp Warning
Indicator Lamp* Warning
Lamp* Lamp
Lamp
Airbag Check Rear Fog
Right Turn ESP Malfunction Glow Plug
Warning ENGINE ! Engine Lamp
Indicator Warning Lamp* Indicator*
Lamp* Lamp Indicator*
Battery
Head Lamp Charging Cruise
HHC Front Fog Lamp High Beam System
immobiliser Control
Malfunction* Indicator* Lamp Warning Indicator*
Lamp
High
Engine Parking
ABS Door Ajar Coolant Brake ON/
START Engine Stop/Start OBD/MIL
Warning Warning A Tempera- Brake Fluid
Lamp* Check Lamp
Lamp Lamp STOP ture Low Warning
Warning Lamp*
Lamp
Low Fuel
Warning Global TPMS
EPS Malfunction*
Lamp Malfunction*
* if equipped / select models or variants only

4.2 Warning Lamps
Sr. Lamp Status while

Symbol Warning Lamp/Telltale Lamp Pre-check Action/Remarks
No. Engine running
Indicates left turn lamp is blinking
S l o w B l i n k i n g : Normal operation
1 Left Turn Indicator No Slow or Fast Blinking
F a s t B l i n k i n g : One / more left turn lamp bulb has
fused. Have the bulb replaced
Indicates right turn lamp is blinking
S l o w B l i n k i n g : Normal operation
2 Right Turn Indicator No Slow or Fast Blinking
F a s t B l i n k i n g : One /more right turn lamp bulb has
fused. Have the bulb replaced
3 Rear Fog Lamp Indicator* No Continuously ON Indicates rear fog lamp is ON
4 Cruise Control Indicator* Yes Continuously ON Indicates vehicle is in Cruise mode
Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp* Continuously ON Indicates water-in-fuel. Drain the water from filter or
5 Yes
contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance
S l o w B l i n k i n g : Vehicle is armed with the remote
F a s t B l i n k i n g / C o n t i n u o u s l y O N : Indicates a system
6 Immobiliser No Blinking
malfunction
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact an

7 ABS Warning Lamp Yes Continuously ON
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately


No. Engine running
Either one of the below conditions:
Parking Brake ON/Brake Fluid 1. Park Brake might be engaged
8 Yes Continuously ON 2. Brake fluid level might be low
Low Warning Lamp/EBD*
3. There is some concern in EBD. Please contact
Mahindra Dealer.
9 Parking Lamp No Continuously ON Indicates Parking Lamp is ON
Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact an

10 Airbag Warning Lamp* Yes Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact an

11 HHC Malfunction* No Continuously ON
Indicates one or more doors and/or boot/hood are

12 Door Ajar Warning Lamp No Continuously ON
open
Continuously ON/ Indicates fuel level has reached the reserve level. re-
13 Low Fuel Warning Lamp No Blinking fuel immediately
ESP OFF Lamp* Continuously ON Indicates ESP OFF

14 Yes


No. Engine running
B l i n k i n g : Indicates ESC has taken control of the vehicle
stability
ESP Malfunction Warning Continuously ON or
15 Yes C o n t i n u o u s l y O N : Indicates a malfunction in the ESC
Lamp* Blinking
system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
immediately
Front Fog Lamp Indicator* Continuously Lamp Indicates front fog lamp is ON
16 No
ON
C o n t i n u o u s l y O N : Engine is in auto stop mode
START Continuously ON or
17 A Engine Stop/Start Lamp* Yes B l i n k i n g : Engine Stop/Start is about to stop the
Blinking
STOP engine
Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible
Continuously ON or malfunction in Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section
18 Tiretronics* Yes Blinking in INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES/WHEELS AND
TYRES chapter for further details
If telltale is not turning OFF even after fastening the
19 Seat Belt Warning Lamp No Continuously ON seat belt, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for
assistance
Indicates a malfunction in the starting system. Contact
20 Glow Plug Indicator* No. Continuously ON
an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
21 Head Lamp High Beam Lamp No Continuously ON Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON
Continuously ON or Telltale will be ON till engine starts. After engine starts,

22 OBD Check Lamp Yes Blinking if is still ON there is a potential malfunction related to


No. Engine running
emission system, contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer immediately
After Pre-check Indicates malfunction on Electronic Power steering
23 EPS Warning Lamp* Continuously ON Continuously ON system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
till Engine Starts immediately
Telltale will be ON in ignition ON But engine is OFF. In
Low Engine Oil Pressure engine ON condition, it indicates engine oil pressure is
24 No Continuously ON
Warning Lamp low. Check oil level and top-up or contact an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer for assistance
Continuously ON or Indicates a potential malfunction in the EMS, contact
25 ENGINE ! Check Engine Lamp Yes Blinking an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
Battery Charging System Indicates malfunction in charging system. Contact

26 No Continuously ON
Warning Lamp Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance
High Engine Coolant Continuously ON or Engine temperature very high. Contact Authorised
27 Temperature Warning Lamp No Blinking Mahindra Dealer immediately
* if equipped / select models or variants only

SEATS AND SEAT BELTS
5 SEATS AND SEAT BELTS • Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest
on the steering wheel
5.1 Front Seats • Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully depressing the
clutch pedal
5.1.1 Sitting in Correct Position
The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the

foot pedals (able to fully depress the clutch pedal), steering
wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of
the instrument panel controls.
Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. The
seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to
unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the
Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey: steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an
accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
against the seat back
Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the
• The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 6 seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position
positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in
position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal
your head injury.
• Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat
wheel. Maintain at least a ten inch (10") distance from the or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.
centre of the steering wheel to your chest

SEA TS A ND SEA T BELTS
5.1.2 Front Seat Slide 5.1.3 Front Seat Recline
To move the seat forward or backward, pull and hold the seat slide To change the seat back angle, lean forward slightly and raise the lever.
lever up and move the seat to the desired position. Then, release Then, lean back to the desired angle and release the lever. After
the lever to lock. adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to its original position and the
seat back is locked.
While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully on
both side of the fore-aft adjustment track rails and the seat is The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear
locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked seat may collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
move in a sudden stop or collision, causing injury to the person back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to ensure that it is your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or
locked. the shoulder strap may contact your neck. The more the seat is
reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury.

5.2 Head Restraint

When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright
position, make sure you support the seat back while operating
the lever.
5.1.4 Front Seat Height Adjustment (if equipped)
To raise the head restraint, pull it up without pressing the release

button. To lower the head restraint, press the release button on top
of the seat back and push the head restraint down.
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in

To lower the seat cushion, push the lever down several times. serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever up several times.
Do not apply excessive force to the head restraint during

adjustment. It may get damaged.
Do not adjust the height of seat while vehicle is in motion.

5.3 Passenger Seat
5.3.1 Passenger Seat Recline When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright
position, make sure you support the seat back while operating
the lever.
5.3.2 Passenger Seat Slide
To change the seat back angle, lean forward slightly and raise the
lever. Then, lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.
After adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to its original
position and the seat back is locked.
To move the seat forward or backward, pull and hold the seat slide
lever up and move the seat to the desired position. Then, release
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear the lever to lock.
collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully on
the shoulder strap may contact your neck. The more the seat is both side of the fore-aft adjustment track rails and the seat is
reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury. locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked seat may
move in a sudden stop or collision, causing injury to the person

in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to ensure that it is

locked.
Do not apply excessive force to the head restraint during
adjustment. It may get damaged.
5.3.3 Passenger Seat Head Restraint
The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts 5.4 Rear Seat
your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top of the
seat back.
Your vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help
limit head motion in the event of rear collision.
Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or
as close to it as possible. To lower the head restraint, press the
lock knob and push the head restraint down.
Second row bench seat is of 60:40 split configuration and also has
a foldable armrest.
Head restraint are provided for front row and second row.

serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision.

5.4.1 Head Restraint Adjustment 5.4.2 Folding The Rear Seat Back
To fold down the rear seat back:

• Insert the rear seat belt buckle and belt webbing in the storage
to prevent the seat belt from being damaged
• Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position
• Release the seatback lock by pulling the release lever


serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. When locking the rear seatback into upright position, make sure
you hear “click” sound.
If possible, place the centre line of the head restraint at the

passenger’s eye level. When the seatback is released from its holding latch, the
If the passenger is too tall or too short, adjust the head seatback can completely be folded. Ensure that none of your
restraints to highest or lowest position. body parts are trapped.

• Do not fold or unfold the rear seat when the vehicle is

moving
• Make sure that there is nobody on the folded seatback and
in cargo area
• If you put sharp or heavy objects on the seatback, there
might be some damage to the seatbacks or even to the
• Fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle seats
• To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward. Pull the • Without completely lowering the second row head restraints
seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback or with excessively reclined front seat back, there may be
is locked in place some damage to the head restraints or the centre console if
Rear Seatback Holding Latch the second row seats are folded
• Take care that there are no objects placed on the rear seat
cushion before folding the rear seat back down as any sharp
features in the object may damage the seat cover
• All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made

before any driving
(if equiped)
• Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjusting
Before returning the folded seat back to the normal position. Pull • Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed
the rear seat belt out of the seat back so that the seat belt is not on the seat
jammed with the holding latch.

• Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result being locked, causing severe injuries or death during a
in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make collision
sure that the head restraints are in place and adjusted
before driving • Always raise the seat back to the proper upright position
before driving
• Do not recline the seat back more than needed for comfort
while vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective • Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a collision, you
when the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the protection
the seat back is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding the seat belt can provide
under the lap belt and getting injured are increased • To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries and
• Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This can death, sit in the position so that the distance between the
cause unexpected accident steering wheel and your chest is at least 10 inches, as long
as you are comfortable with driving
• You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the seat
when trying to get the small objects (cigarette lighters, coins, • Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between the
credit cards) under the seat or caught between the seat and seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat is
the centre console. Wear protective gloves to prevent injury potentially flammable when it is released from the container
when the seat is moved
• Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving
• Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion
• Unexpected movement of the seat or seat back can cause reduces the frictional force and could make you slide under
loss of control the seat belt. This could result in serious injury or death
• Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when • Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of the
adjusting the seat position seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands or
fingers could get trapped between the seat and the frame
• Sit upright in the centre of the seat and wear the seat belt
around your hip and pelvic bones • Do not ride with the seat back reclined too much. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could result in
• Do not place any objects in the path of seat back movement. severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be protected by the
Any obstruction in this path prevents the seat back from seat belt and the belt can strangle you or even cut into your

stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in your seat by keeping be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of
your seat back upright while driving your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of
the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your
• When returning the seat back to the upright position, hold shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your
the seat back with your one hand and pull the release lever shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be
with the other hand. The more the seat back is reclined, the flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such
greater the restoring force of the seat back is. If you do not as an armrest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be
hold the seat back while adjusting the seat back, you could between you and the seat belt. Improper wearing of a seat belt
be injured by the restoring force will reduce the protection in an accident
• Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent
5.5 Seat Belts with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat
5.5.1 General Warnings and Instructions
At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any
cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the
edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be
sure they are tight and operational.
• All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat
belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimise the risk of
severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted
passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to
himself or another passenger • The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people
• In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely of adult size, must be properly used and maintained
prone to injury than a person wearing a seat belt • For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section
• In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight on manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint
and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must system

phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or

sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle
Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt

will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious
injury.
• Seat belt systems can be prone to abuse. They are not
indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage
• Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the • Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become
vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt difficult if the belts and webbing are soiled. If they need cleaning,
can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach,
occupants, or out of the vehicle during a crash or emergency dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken
stop the belts
• Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way • Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when
the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to
comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During
provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden
injury in a crash forward movement of the wearer
• An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt Seat Belts - Patients
system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your
Authorised Mahindra Dealer inspect the seat belt system after Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat
an accident belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before
travel.
• Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such
as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile

Seat Belts - Pregnant Women
Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be

transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision, resulting
in serious personal injury.
Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one
seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The
seat belt will not be able to spread the impact forces properly
leading to serious injuries.
Never put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's

Pregnant women must also wear seat belts. Consult your doctor lap. This could lead to serious injuries.
for specific recommendations.
Seat Belt Usage is necessary to:
The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the
hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but • Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle
never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt • Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and
will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or legs during an accident
emergency stop.
• Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the
vehicle
A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always
stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion
and/or the pregnant mother. should be fastened snug on the hips and as low as possible and the
shoulder strap should be across the child's shoulder, not the neck
or face. If you are unable to position the strap across the child's
shoulder, the child should remain in a booster seat. Frequently

INSTRUMENT CLUST ER FEA TURES

check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A
squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.
5.5.2 Fastening the Seat Belt (3-Point type)
CORRECT SEAT BELT

POSITIONING
Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat.
To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor and
insert the metal tab into the buckle. An audible “click” would be
heard when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder
strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt
W12E23 retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy
motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body
around freely.
Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains
snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will
lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward
too quickly.
W12E24 If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates
and chimes beat will turn till seat belt is fastened. Refer

“Warning Lamps” in the “Features and Control” chapter for

further details.
Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent
you from properly latching the tab and may cause damage to
5.5.3 Unfastening the Seat Belt (Both 3-Point & 2-Point) the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective
in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and
check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it
retracts.

5.5.4 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) 5.5.5 Seat Belt Height Adjuster
PODS system is to detect the presence of occupant in the seat. You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor for maximum
comfort and safety in both front seats. If the height of the seat belt
If occupant is present and not wearing seat belt, seat is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective
belt reminder warning lamp will come ON till the seat protection. The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so
belt is buckled. that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder
Along with this warning lamp Chime in Cluster will be ON for 35 nearest to the door and not your neck.
secs. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the
height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing the height
adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position.
Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into
the position.
Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat. Do
not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.

5.6 Infant and Child Safety
Restraint device Front Mounting method of

Mass group Rear centre Rear out board
figure Passenger vehicle
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 months) Rear-facing child seat U U U 3-point belt rear-facing
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 years) Rear-facing child seat U U U 3-point belt rear-facing
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 months ~ 4 Forward-facing child
U U U 3-point
years) seat
II ~ 15 to 25 kg (4 years ~ 6
Booster seat U U U 3-point
years)
III ~ 22 to 36 kg (6 years ~ 12
Booster seat U U U 3-point
years)
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list.
the mass group. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.
approved for use in the mass group.

Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
Mass group Size Class Fixture Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Front Passenger Rear centre Rear out board
F ISO/L1 X X X
Carrycot
G ISO/L2 X X X
Group 0 up to 10kg E ISO/R1 X X IUF
E ISO/R1 X X IUF
Group 0+ up to 13kg D ISO/R2 X X IUF
C ISO/R3 X X X
D ISO/R2 X X IUF
C ISO/R3 X X X
Group I9 to 18kg B ISO/F2 X X IUF
B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF
A ISO/F3 X X IUF
X: ISOFIX position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this
mass group and/or this size class.
Key of letters be inserted in the above table
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal
category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given
in attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”,
“restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.

Anchorage Location 5.6.1 Warning for Child Restraint
• Use only the officially approved child restraint

Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property
damage due to the defect of child restraint
• Use only the child restraint with proper type and size for your baby
• Use only the child restraint at proper location
• Child restraint has 5 cate gories based on the weight as below:
Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as shown in
the figure. 1 GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10KG 4 GROUP II : 15 ~ 25KG
2 GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13KG 5 GROUP III : 22 ~ 36KG
3 GROUP I : 9 ~ 18KG
• Group 0 & 0+
Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
• Group I
Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
• Group II & III
Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened.
Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by
• Never transport them unless they are properly restrained the manufacturer of the booster seat
• Use restrained system which meet safety standard
• Follow directions provided by the manufacturer

Cautions for ISOFIX Seat
• The rear seatback anchor is the supplemental device to

secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the
lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint
system only with the seatback anchors. The increased load
may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious
injury or death
• If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and
a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the
child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always
follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for
installation
• Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are
latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the
“click” sound
• The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the correct seatback
anchor
• Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured
by rocking it in different directions
• Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an
unexpected personal injury

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
6 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) 6.1 Airbags
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, pre- Your vehicle is equipped with the following airbags:
tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further
• D r i v e r ’ s A i r b a g : A frontal airbag for the driver in Steering wheel
protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary
hub
protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.
The primary components of the system are the sensors which
measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal
impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat
belts and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's and front
passenger's head/chest.
Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An

airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat
belts. • P a s s e n g e r ’ s A i r b a g ( i f e q u i p p e d ) : A frontal airbag for the front
All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their passenger in the passenger side instrument panel
seat belts to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a
crash.
Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat
belts are worn.

SUPPLEMENTA L RESTRA INT SYSTEM (SRS)
• K n e e A i r b a g ( i f e q u i p p e d ) : The driver’s knee airbag is located on • S i d e S e a t A i r b a g ( i f e q u i p p e d ) : The side seat airbag are installed
the dashboard under the steering wheel. in each front seat back. It is designed to inflate only in an impact
to the side of the vehicle and protect occupants’ body
• S i d e C u r t a i n A i r b a g ( i f e q u i p p e d ) : The side curtain airbags are

contained between right above the front and rear doors and the
end of the vehicle roof. The side curtain airbag is designed to
inflate only in an impact to the side of the vehicle and protect An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash.
occupants’ heads. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags
independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not
necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.
To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every
passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on
Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great
force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you
or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying
airbag.

6.2 Front Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag
(Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front and yourself.
passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's
Knee Airbag (if equipped)
presence are the letters “AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad
cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel The driver’s knee airbag is located on the dashboard under the
pad above the glove box. steering wheel, the driver’s knee airbag can help protect the driver
The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact by inflating simultaneously with the front airbag in head-on collision.
is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30°
from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag
If the driver’s posture is improper while driving, the knee airbag

might not protect the driver’s knee area when the airbag is
Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact deployed.
or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal
crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold
where risk of serious injuries is low.

6.3 Seat Side Airbag and Curtain Airbag (if equipped) • The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt
systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your
Seat Side Airbag Curtain Airbag seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in
motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact
conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the
vehicle occupants
• For best protection from the side impact airbag system and
to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all
seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat
belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The
passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps
Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front • Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers
seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system
and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side • Do not instal any accessories on the side or near the side
impacts or collisions. impact airbag
The side impact airbag are designed to deploy only during certain • Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the
side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed airbag and yourself
and point of impact.
• Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact
• In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be airbag inflates
deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side
the collision occurs

6.4 Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch 6.5 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp
Airbags do not require any regular maintenance of

service. The airbag system malfunction lamp
illuminates when the ignition is ON, and it turns OFF
after about 2 secs. as self check confirming normal
operations of airbag system and malfunction lamp.
This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors,
indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of
the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact your
A OFF/Deactivated B ON/Activated
Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
The front passenger airbag is disabled (not inflatable) when placing • The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or
the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch to “OFF” position. This switch glows beyond six (6) secs. after switching the ignition ON
is located on the left side of the instrument panel, and you can see it
when opening the front passenger door. Press and turn this switch • The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly
to operate • The lamp comes ON intermittently
Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator
This indicator comes on when turning the passenger

Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect
airbag ON/OFF switch to “OFF” position to disable
the performance of your airbag system. In particular, changes
the passenger airbag.
to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride
height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering
wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent
proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any

modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating,
please contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to
Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover manoeuvre or operate other controls.
is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function Deployment of the airbags happen in a fraction of a second,
as intended. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Mahindra producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along
Dealer. with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some
vehicle to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for a thorough inspection minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off
of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any
accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may potential skin irritation. If you can safely exit the vehicle, you should
not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury. do so immediately.
6.6 Airbag Inflation/Deployment

Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of
the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond
the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag
• Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-
inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the
tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or
airbags with non-toxic gas.
wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them
Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the
separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. system or disable the system, which could result in serious
Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A injury
fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, • Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover
slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after
risk of head and chest injury. deployment. The airbags inflate only once

• Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel with any

object (e. g. dash panel covers) which may prevent the
airbags from inflating properly
• The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to
the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe
injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are
usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and
swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause
more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands,
arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag
module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back
into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering
allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag
properly operate/drive the vehicle deployment.
• The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering
wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle
The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, • The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from
stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of the dashboard
the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.
• Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to
be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious
injury

• Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats

could interfere with the operation of the supplemental
restraint system or side impact airbags
• Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items
under the front seats could interfere with the operation of
the supplemental restraint system sensing components and
wiring harnesses
6.7 Child Restraint and Airbag
• Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position,

on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs
comfortably extended and your feet on the floor
• All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the
seat belts
“Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by
• All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of an active airbag in front of it”
the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly
restrained by seat belts In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front
• Front airbags can injure occupants improperly positioned in passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it
the front seats could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
• Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following
occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. position:
Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and • On the front passenger’s sun visor
occupant safety contained in this manual

Front Airbag
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending
seat protected by an active airbag in front of it! on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.
Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child
could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and 6.9 Airbag Non-deployment
children should be properly restrained in appropriate child
safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat. Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the
airbag to deploy in the following cases:
6.8 Airbag Deployment • Collision with Utility Poles or Trees -
Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated
The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the
only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle. sensors.

• Under-ride Situations - Rear-end Collisions -

Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions,
where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by
the force of the impact. In this case, inflated airbags would not
be able to provide any additional benefit.
Running under a truck may not provide the decelerations

necessary for airbag deployment. Airbags will not inflate in this
“under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors are significantly low.

• Frontal Impact - • Rollover -

Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to the vehicle.
Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag

deployment would not provide protection to the occupants.
• Potholes or Stepped Surfaces -
Frontal Side Swipe Impact -
Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side
of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the

deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment. In an angled

collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a 6.13 Airbag Repair
direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any If the front airbag cover or IP airbag cover shows signs of damage
airbags. or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest
Authorised Mahindra Dealer for repair. Do not attempt to self
repair or reinstal the cover.
6.10 Airbag Replacement
Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An 6.14 Airbag Maintenance
airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not
deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or
Authorised Mahindra Dealer for inspection and repairs. one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
6.11 Self Removing SRS Related Parts
Self removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seat belts or
airbag related parts or sensors is not recommended. Airbags could
accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not
deploy when there is a need. Visit an Authorised Mahindra Dealer if
these parts must be removed.
6.12 Airbag Disposal
Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be

extremely dangerous. Approach an Authorised Mahindra Dealer to
do these jobs.

LOCKS AND KEYS
7 LOCKS AND KEYS Your key number is shown on the tag attached to the key. It is
recommended that you record the key number and store in a safe
Your X U V 3 0 0 comes with three types of keys depending on the place.
variant. The keys operate all locks in your vehicle including those of
the doors and ignition with steering lock. We advise you to keep one
of these keys in a safe place for emergency use, but not in the
vehicle. Should you lose your keys or if you need replacement keys, There is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of
they can be ordered through an Authorised Mahindra Dealer. keys that can be programmed.
The minimum timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys
is 20 days after all the formalities are completed. Please
contact the Authorised Mahindra Dealer to understand the
formalities involved.
Never leave the key in the ignition switch with children in the
vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start the engine,
operate power windows and other controls, or move the
vehicle, resulting in personal injuries to the bystanders and/or
children seated inside.
Key Number Tag:

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.1 Doors
7.1.1 To Open a Door from Inside
Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward
to open.
7.1.3 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from Inside
Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the

respective door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock or
press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.
7.1.2 To Open a Door from Outside

A : Lock B : Unlock
Pull the door handle firmly outwards to unlock and swing the door
open.

LOCKS AND KEYS
Locking the driver / co-driver door from inside activates the A keyhole is provided in the driver door to lock/unlock the
central locking system, thereby locking/unlocking ALL the doors manually from outside.
doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further
details.
Locking the driver door from outside activates the central
7.1.4 Manual Locking / Unlocking Doors from Outside locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle.
Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
The driver/co-driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from
outside by using conventional key. The key is bi-directional; you can
insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to 7.1.5 Locking / Unlocking the Back Door
lock or clockwise to unlock the door.
The tailgate is locked/unlocked when locking/unlocking the doors.
To open the tailgate, press the switch located on the inner side of
the tailgate door handle.
Now tailgate is unlocked lift it up
A : Lock B : Unlock

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.2 Tailgate Safety Release Lever
• Before closing the tailgate, ensure that none of your body Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release
parts are trapped. Also, because the tailgate is heavy, it lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is
might unexpectedly fall down and close. To prevent any inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment.
injury, close the tailgate with caution
You can open the tailgate inside the vehicle.
• The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people
1. Open the cover.
are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate
• Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where
no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an
accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained
• If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious
injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with
the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all windows open so
2. To unlock the tailgate, push the emergency safety release lever
that additional outside air comes into the vehicle
inside the trim panel to right side.
Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is in

motion, resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel with
the tailgate open.
Make sure that you close the tailgate before driving. Possible
damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached
objects if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
Remove any obstacles to interrupt closing the tailgate securely. 3. Push the tailgate to open.

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.3 Central Locking System
• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or unlocked
caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion from the driver/co-driver door and with the switch provided in
quadruple switch.
• For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the
emergency tailgate safety release lever in this vehicle and
how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the 7.3.1 Central Locking / Unlocking All Doors from
luggage compartment Outside
• Do not allow children to play in cargo area. If they open the
To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the
tailgate with the opening lever abruptly, it may cause a
conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively
serious personal injury
in the driver door keyhole.
• No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage
compartment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage
compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a
crash
A : Lock
B : Unlock
If any doors are open when central locking is activated, the

system locks the open doors when they are closed.

LOCKS AND KEYS
Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done To activate the child safety right rear door lock, insert the key and
using the Remote key. Refer the relevant sections in this rotate towards anti-clockwise direction.
chapter for more details.
To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, insert the key
and rotate towards clockwise direction.
7.3.2 Central Locking / Unlocking All Doors from Inside
A : Lock B : Unlock
Press the driver and co-driver door lock tab down (A) to lock or lift
the lock tab up (B) to unlock all doors simultaneously.
A : Lock B : Unlock
If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the
child safety locks have been disabled.
Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door
7.3.3 Child Safety Rear Door Lock locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear
seat.
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right side child safety rear
door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door(s)
cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened
from the outside.

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System (if equipped) Press the mechanical key release button to open the key blade.
The front side of the Remote has three control buttons: Unlock,
Lock and Search button. There is also a mechanical key release
button (E).
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on Radio
Frequency (RF). You can insert the key into the ignition with either
side up.
A : Mechanical key release button

B : Lock button
C : Search button 7.4.1 Precautions while Handling Remote Key
D : Unlock button
• Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF
E : LED
waves
• Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long
period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight
• Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer
7.4.2 Remote Key Status LED

LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the
Remote lock/unlock/trunk button input and also health of Remote
battery.

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.4.3 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with Remote 7.4.4 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with Remote
Press the lock button on the Remote for locking and arming the Press the unlock button on the Remote to unlock and disarm the
vehicle. vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked and disarmed using Remote,
Hazard lamps and buzzer flash twice.
When the vehicle is successfully locked and armed using the
Remote, the hazard lamps and buzzer will flash once.
If there are any doors open, the hazard lamps flash five times along
with audible beeps indicating the same.
7.4.5 Theft Alarm

If there was an unauthorised attempt to open/start the vehicle by
• If any of the doors, are open while locking the vehicle with someone from the time you had locked and armed the vehicle to
Remote, the vehicle locks all doors (door locks) irrespective of the time you press the unlock button of Remote, the hazard lamps
the open door/doors. When the open door (s) is/are closed flash four times along with an alarm indicating the attempt.
later, the vehicle is locked and armed If this occurs, press the “UNLOCK” button on the Remote to disarm
the security alarm.

LOCKS AND KEYS
vehicle. To extend the search, press the search button again which
will flash the hazard lamps and burglar horn for another 30 secs.
Using the ignition key to open the door, when the vehicle was Again press the search button on the Remote for more than 1
locked and armed with Remote will be treated as unauthorised second or un-lock button on the remote to d e - a c t i v a t e the search
by the system setting off the alarm. function.
When vehicle is armed by Remote , opening the door from
inside by operating the door inner handle will activate the
vehicle theft alarm. Press the unlock button on the Remote to The head lamps also turn ON when UNLOCK button is pressed
cancel the alarm. twice (enabling the Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV) feature). For the
first UNLOCK command, the doors are unlocked, and for the
7.4.6 Search Function next UNLOCK command, the head lamps turn ON enabling you
to safely board/locate the vehicle in the night.
If horn is in Mute condition, only hazard lamps will flash for 30
seconds during search function.
Search function works both during Locked/Unlocked conditions
of the vehicle.
7.4.7 Auto Locking
This feature enables all doors to lock automatically, when all doors
are closed and vehicle speed if greater than 20 kmph.
The search function can be used to locate the vehicle in a parking
lot. Press the search button on the Remote for more than 1 sec. 7.4.8 Auto Re-locking (if applicable)
continuously to a c t i v a t e the search function.
After unlocking the vehicle using Remote, if none of the doors are
When the Search function is ON, the hazard lamps and burglar opened in 45 seconds Auto re-lock of all doors will happen.
horn will flash for approx. 30 secs. helping you to locate your

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.4.9 Auto Re-lock on Master Actuator Unlock 7.4.12 Auto Unlock On Ignition OFF
Once Auto locking happened and if the Master Actuator was When Ignition is switched off, all doors will get unlocked
unlocked at any vehicle speed, next Auto lock will reoccur when the automatically, if locked.
vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and again crosses 20 kmph with
all the doors in closed condition. There are no visual indications for this operation.
7.4.10 Auto Re-lock On Any Door Open 7.4.13 Auto Unlock Upon Crash
Once Auto locking is occurred, and if any door is opened when In vehicles equipped with airbags, Auto Unlock of doors takes place
vehicle speed is less than 5 kmph, Auto Lock will reoccur only when in case of an unfortunate event of an accident and airbags are
vehicle speed crosses 20 kmph in all doors closed and master deployed.
actuator in lock condition.
7.4.14 Thermal Protection
7.4.11 Anti Lockout
Door lock mechanism does not respond to remote/CDL requests,
This feature will not allow the doors to lock, if any door is open and if Lock / Unlock are performed 8 or more times within 20 seconds.
someone tries to lock the doors by using inside master actuator.
Lock/Unlock will not happen for 20 seconds and after lapse of this
However, if repeatedly attempt to lock for 3 times then, doors will time limit, it will function normally.
get locked.

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.4.15 Remote Key Operating Range transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in
range of Remote key
Using Remote, you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from • Check the Remote key battery: See battery replacement
distances approx. 30ft. (9m). procedure, given later in this section
• If the Remote key is still not working correctly, contact an
Authorised Mahindra Dealer
7.4.16 If Remote Key is Lost
If you have lost the programmed Remote key, contact an

Authorised Mahindra Dealer for procuring a new Remote key.
While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the
keys available with you, to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to

If there is reduction in Remote range, please follow the steps the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum
below: timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 20 days
after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the
• Check the distance: The Remote key may be too far from the Authorised Mahindra Dealer to understand the formalities
vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad involved.
weather
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to
• Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking deactivate the theft detent devices or start the engine.
the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the
Remote key higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Authorised
radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport Mahindra Dealer for de-activating the function of the lost or

LOCKS AND KEYS
stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access using The front side of the Smart Key has three control buttons: Lock (B)
the misplaced key. and Panic button (C), Unlock (D). There is also a emergency key
Only Remote key transmitters programmed to your vehicle release button (A), which releases a mechanical key for emergency
electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of purposes (E.g. when PKE battery is low). To remove the metal key,
your vehicle. press and hold the release button (B) and pull the mechanical key
out.
7.5 Smart Key System/Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) (if

equipped)
Smart Key System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the
need to manually lock/unlock the doors. You can start/stop, lock or
unlock the vehicle using Smart Key. To do this, you only need to carry the
Smart Key with you.
A : Mechanical key release button

B : Lock button
C : Search button
D : Unlock button • When locking or unlocking with Smart Key, the distance
E : LED between the Smart Key and the corresponding door handle
must not be greater than 3ft (1m).
• Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF
waves
Remote Key Panic alarm feature is not available in Smart Key • Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a
variants. long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct
sunlight

LOCKS AND KEYS
• Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic 5. Make sure that the doors are locked by pulling at the outside
washer door handles
• The Smart Key can malfunction if exposed to moisture or
static electricity
Carrying the Smart Key along with you, you can lock or unlock the • Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7m from the
doors and tail door and even start and stop the engine without outside door handle
inserting the key. Functions of the buttons on a Smart Key is similar • Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the button in the
to the remote keyless entry. door handle nearer to the PKE (PKE should be nearer to the
triggered side). E. g., locking/unlocking of the co-driver door
Locking the vehicle:
is possible only if PKE is around the co-driver area
1. Carry the Smart Key
• Even after pressing the outside door handle button, if the
2. Close all the doors doors do not lock, a chime is heard for 5 times, then one of
3. Press the button in the door handle the following situations are true:
– A Smart Key is kept inside the vehicle
– The vehicle/key is in IGN ON or ACC ON position
– One of the doors not closed properly
• On attempting to lock by pressing the button in door handle,
the chime will sound for 3 times if the steering is not locked
• With the one Smart Key inside, on locking the vehicle using
the remote lock button, the key which is kept inside would
get deactivated completely for the security of the vehicle. In
4. The hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate the locking order to make the key to active again, the vehicle should be
(5 blinks will be provided if engine hood is open while locking) unlocked either using Smart Key or by pressing remote
unlock

LOCKS AND KEYS
Unlocking the vehicle:

1. Carry the Smart Key
2. Press the button in the door handle
3. All doors would unlock and hazard warning lights will blink twice
• Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7m from the

outside door handle
• Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the button in • Before closing the tailgate, ensure that none of your body
the door handle only when the key is in same side of the door parts are trapped. Also, because the tailgate is heavy, it
where the button is pressed might unexpectedly fall down and close. To prevent any
Unlocking the Tail door alone: injury, close the tailgate with caution
• The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people
The tailgate is locked/unlocked when locking/unlocking the doors. are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate
To open the tailgate, touch the opening switch inner side of the • Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where
tailgate door handle with the tailgate unlocked, and then lift it up. no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an
accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be
In theft deterrent mode, you can unlock only the tailgate by pressing
properly restrained
the tailgate switch with the smart key. The tailgate will be locked
again when closing it. • If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious
If the smart key felt inside unknowingly and if tail door closed, all the injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with
doors will unlock automatically with hazard and buzzer blinks twice. the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all windows open so
that additional outside air comes into the vehicle

LOCKS AND KEYS
Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is in

motion, resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel with
the tailgate open.
Make sure that you close the tailgate before driving. Possible
damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached
objects if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
Remove any obstacles to interrupt closing the tailgate securely.
Mute/Unmute the Alarm/Beeps
The alarm or beeps heard when one of the doors are open can be 7.5.1 Engine START/STOP Button
muted/unmuted. Press the lock button for more than 1 secs. to
swap between mute and unmute. The engine can be started or stopped by the presence of the Smart
Key inside the vehicle.
Only the door open beeps and alarm can be muted. The PKE
alerts cannot be muted.

LOCKS AND KEYS
Whenever the doors are opened, the engine start/stop button If the engine is not switching off by pressing the engine start/
will be illuminated and go off after few seconds. stop button (one press), press and hold the engine start/stop
button for more than 3 seconds or rapidly press and release
Upon any fault identification by the system in the start/stop switch, the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On
an alert would be provided in the Instrument cluster. Please visit the doing so, the vehicle ignition status is changed to ACC position
nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately to rectify the till 30 seconds, then it will change to OFF position. Contact the
problem. nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer at the earliest.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column
lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop button is
Even with the failure in the start/stop switch, vehicle's normal in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks
function may work which depends on the severity of the failure. automatically when the driver door is opened or 25 seconds after
Please visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer to rectify engine start/stop button changes to OFF position. If the steering
the problem immediately. wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver door and on
Engine start/stop button positions: attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the
hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again (by
To operate the engine start/stop switch to its intended function, toggling Engine Start/Stop button). If the problem is not solved, we
Smart Key should be inside the vehicle. recommend to take the vehicle to nearest Authorised Mahindra
Dealer immediately.
OFF
ON
To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and press the engine start/
stop button once. Status LED in the engine start/stop button goes To switch ON the ignition, press the engine start/stop button when
OFF to indicate the OFF position. the switch position is in OFF/ACC without depressing the clutch
pedal and with the Smart Key inside the vehicle. Status LED in the
engine start/stop button will turn Red to indicate the IGN ON
position and the vehicle is ready for starting.

LOCKS AND KEYS
• If the key is not detected inside the vehicle or far away from the
driver which is not in detectable position
Keeping the vehicle in ignition ON position for longer time
without engine running, would drain the battery. Turn OFF the
ignition if engine is not to be started.
Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the following
conditions:
• If the electronic steering lock is not getting unlocked
– A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the
steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop
button while turning the steering wheel right/left to release
the tension on the lock.
– A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster along
with a beep sound for a few secs. Bring the Smart Key inside
the vehicle if not in the vehicle or keep the key away from any
electronic gadgets to allow the system to detect the key
– If still the key is not detected, the key battery might be low.
Press the start/stop button once and while the status LED in
the button is blinking RED, bring the key fob on top of the
start/stop button and hold for few seconds till status LED
changes to permanent RED. Once start/stop status LED
turns RED, press Start/Stop button to turn ON IGN
immediately
Still, if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the
nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.

LOCKS AND KEYS
Starting the vehicle
To start the engine, press the clutch and press the engine start/
stop button once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be
started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop
switch.
Ensure the gear lever is in neutral position before starting.
• When engine start/stop button is ON or engine is in running

condition with vehicle at standstill and if any door is opened, the If engine start/stop button is pressed without pressing the
system checks for the Smart Key. If the Smart Key is not inside clutch pedal, engine will not start and the vehicle power modes
the vehicle, an alert in the Instrument cluster is displayed along will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON
with a chirp for 5 times to indicate key not detected inside
If the engine start/stop button is pressed from the OFF
position directly, along with the clutch in depressed position,
there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is
normal and not to be taken as a fault.
Never press the engine start/stop button while the vehicle is in
motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine
turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake
systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking
function, leading to an accident.
Once the engine is started, it would not stop even if the key is
not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat, always
Bring the Smart Key inside the vehicle or keep the key in the make sure engine start/stop button is in OFF position and
detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle.

LOCKS AND KEYS
always take the Smart Key with you. Vehicle safety and security
would be affected if these precautions are not followed.
In case of any failure in clutch pedal sensor, engine can be
started by pressing the start/stop button continuously for 10
seconds without depressing the clutch pedal.
Emergency stop
To turn the engine OFF in an emergency, press and hold the engine
start/stop button for more than 2 seconds or rapidly press and
release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On
doing so, the vehicle ignition is changed to ACC position. If key fob battery is detected low by the system, an alert would be
triggered while turning OFF the ignition. Change the battery by
If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine (without following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery
depressing the brake pedal) by: pressing the engine start/stop replacement.
button, pressing the clutch, gear lever in N position.
BACK up Start
If the key fob battery is low, the key may not be detected. In such a
situation, press the start/stop button once while the status LED in
the button is blinking green, bring the key fob on top of the start/
stop button and hold it there for few seconds till status LED
changes to permanent green. Once start/stop status LED turns
green, press start/stop button to turn ON IGN immediately.

LOCKS AND KEYS
Key fob battery low can be detected only if the key has been
continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key outside the
vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the drained
battery cannot be detected.
7.5.2 Smart Key Warning
When a smart key is left inside the vehicle and all doors are closed,
LCD display shows this message for 10 seconds if you lock the door LCD display shows this message for 10 seconds if the Smart Key
using the other smart key. battery is weak when you press the engine Start/Stop button.
Replace the battery with new one.
LCD display shows this message if you leave the vehicle with the
Smart Key when the engine Start/Stop button is ON or Start LCD display shows this message when engine start fails due to the
position. battery discharged Smart Key and etc.

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.5.3 Vehicle Locking/Unlocking in an Emergency

Situation
If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock
the doors by using the mechanical key:
1. To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release
button in the side of the key fob and pull the mechanical key
head.
2. Insert the key into the keyhole in the door nearer to the door
handle. Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to unlock
LCD display shows this message for 10 seconds when there is and turn it towards the front to lock.
malfunction on the engine Start/Stop button or Smart Key system. 3. To reinstal the mechanical key, put the key into the key fob and
If the message appears constantly, bring your vehicle to Authorised push it until a click is heard
Mahindra Dealer for checkup.
It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle.

Vehicle can be started by any unauthorised person.
A maximum of 2 Smart Keys can be registered to a single
vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately to block the lost key
and to get a new key.
The Smart Key may not work if any of the following occurs:
• The Smart Key is close to a radio station, airport or an area
where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which
can interfere with the normal operation of the Smart Key

LOCKS AND KEYS
• The Smart Key is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some 7.6 If Smart Key is Lost
electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the
Smart Key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell If you have lost the programmed Smart Key, contact an Authorised
phone or smartphone. Avoid placing the Smart Key and your Mahindra Dealer for procuring a new Smart Key.
electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the
bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the
keys available with you, to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
• Another vehicle Smart Key is being operated close to your
vehicle
• Smart Key kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to
panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the Smart Key in the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum
the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days
• Keep the Smart Key away from the water or any liquid. If the after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the
keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or Authorised Mahindra Dealer to understand the formalities
liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle involved.
warranty If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to
deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the engine.
If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Authorised
Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving Mahindra Dealer for de-activating the function of the lost or
the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition in stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access using
ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security. the misplaced key.
Do not hand over the Smart Key to any unauthorised person or Only Smart Key transmitters programmed to your vehicle
service provider. Your vehicle security system may be electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of
compromised in doing so. your vehicle.

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.7 Battery Replacement for Remote Key/Smart Key 1. Remove the cover at the back side of the Remote Key/Smart
Key using a smallest flat screwdriver while taking care not to
Replacing Procedures: damage it.
2. Slide the battery press and pull of the battery spring.
3. Use only specified battery (CR2032). Make sure that the
battery is installed in correct direction.
4. Instal the battery in the reverse order of removal.
• Use only the specified battery. Otherwise, the remote control

key may not work properly
• Make sure that the battery is installed in correct direction
• Dispose the used battery in accordance with local
regulations
• Both Remote Key and Smart Key are not completely water-
proof. Repairing or replacing a damaged key due to water
exposure (e. g. Drink, moisture, etc.) will not be covered by
your warranty
7.7.1 Battery Specification
Battery Voltage 3V
Battery Capacity 225 mAh

LOCKS AND KEYS
7.8 Theft Detent Warning System 7.9.1 Features of the Immobiliser System
7.8.1 Arming of Vehicle • Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession
of the correct vehicle key
Once all the doors are closed and locked with remote by pressing • The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed
lock button, Theft Detent warning system would get activated. from the ignition. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not
recognise the correct key code, the engine check lamp will
7.8.2 Theft Detent Trigger illuminate/blink and the engine cannot be started
• The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out
If any one tries to manipulate the Ignition or manually opens the of the ignition
doors or manually unlocks the doors, Theft Detent warning system
alarm is activated by blinking the turn lamps and blowing Burglar
horn for 27 secs.
If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously
Once the alarm is triggered, it can be disabled by pressing unlock illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a
button on remote or switching on the Ignition by using valid key. system malfunction. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
immediately.
7.9 Engine Immobiliser System Inserting the correct coded key in the ignition and switching the
ignition ON, automatically deactivates the system. This enables the
An Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that prevents engine to start.
the vehicle from being operated by unauthorised keys. The Engine
immobiliser prevents the engine from being started unless it
recognises signals from the correct coded key. When a wrong key
is inserted or a theft attempt is detected, the alarm is set off, and In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key,
the hazard lamps flash along with a siren. switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and attempt
to start the vehicle again.
The system is automatically activated when the key is removed
from the ignition.

LOCKS AND KEYS
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser

system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications can affect
proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.
The security system will be activated only when the vehicle is

locked using the Smart Key. Locking the doors with the manual
key will not activate the security system.
Using the ignition key to open the door, when the vehicle was
locked and armed with Smart Key will be treated as
unauthorised by the system setting off the alarm. Press the
unlock button on the Smart Key to cancel the alarm.

FEA TURES AND CONTROL
8 FEATURES AND CONTROL • Power window safety switch that enables/disables power
window operation of rear doors when operated independently
8.1 Quadruple Switch from the respective doors
A : ORVM Folding/Unfolding 8.1.1 Power Windows

Switch
B : Aiming Switch Power windows can be operated only when the ignition is “ON”
position.
C : Driver Door Window Switch
D : Rear RH Window Switch Power Window Control after IGN OFF - The power window control
E : Door Lock/Unlock Switch will be available for 30 seconds after IGN OFF condition.
F : Window Lock Switch The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through
G : Rear LH Window Switch the quadruple switch on the driver door armrest/handle.
H : Passenger’s Window Switch
I : Mirror Selection Switch
The quadruple power window switch on the driver door armrest/

handle controls the following functions:
• Both LH and RH ORVM folding
• ORVM selector
• ORVM adjustment
• Power window functions of all doors in the vehicle Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective
window glasses individually by using the separate switches provided
on each of the door trim pads/armrests.

FEATURES AND CONTROL
To lower/raise the window glass push/pull, the power window 8.1.2 Power Window Lock Switch
switches respectively.
The main power window quadruple switch in the driver door trim
has a power window lock switch to enable or disable operation of
rear passenger window switches.
Do not operate the power windows frequently when the engine
is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery. To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window
If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, lock switch down.
the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.
prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to
normal functioning shortly.
It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.
While operating the power windows, check for obstructions like

head, hand, etc. which may lead to personal injuries.
Power Window Control after IGN OFF - The power window

control will be available for 30 seconds after IGN OFF condition.

8.1.3 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch (applicable Auto DOWN

for driver door only) (if equipped)
Press the power window switch down for a moment and release.
Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need to
the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the direction of hold the switch till the glass comes down.
glass if an obstruction is detected during the express up mode. Anti-Pinch during Auto UP
This feature consists of three functions: During Auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value
• Auto UP ranging between 70~100 N (~7-10 kg), the controller senses the
load and reverses the direction of the glass to downward direction
• Auto DOWN for almost full stroke length.
• Anti-Pinch during Auto UP However, if the force against the glass is less than the specified
value, then this function does not operate.
If power window anti-pinch is used continuously for more than

20 times, the power window express feature will have thermal
cut off and it will not operate for 20 seconds and after that for
one cycle it will operate and once the temperature comes to
nominal, then it will start operating normally.
Extended Power Window
Auto UP All doors power windows can be rolled UP/DOWN within 30

seconds after ignition off.
Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The
glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to hold
the switch till the glass closes.

8.2 Mirrors 8.2.2 Electric ORVM (if equipped)
8.2.1 Manual ORVM (if equipped)
The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the

driver door trim/handle. The joystick on the switch can be used to
Integrated exterior rearview mirrors on both the sides facilitate select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.
maximum rear view information to the driver.
Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or 8.2.3 Electric Foldable ORVM (if equipped)
unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while Mirror Fold Function
folding or unfolding. To fold the ORVM assembly, press towards the right side of the
switch with ignition ON condition.
ORVM will get fold automatically when:
Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they
appear. Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that • Key is in out condition, Mirror is already in unfold condition and
you see in the mirrors. RKE LOCK is pressed

ORVM will get unfold automatically when:
For Auto fold function, the switch should be in neutral position. • Key is in out condition, Mirror is already in folded condition and
ORVM switch is neutral condition and IGN is made ON
8.3 Interior Rearview Mirror (IRVM)

The interior rearview mirror provides the rearview information to
the driver and also aids during reversing.
8.3.1 Anti-Glare Auto Adjustment Function (if equipped)
Mirror Unfold Function
A IRVM D Indicator
B Brightness E Front Sensor
Anti-glare auto
C adjustment switch
To unfold the ORVM assembly, press towards the left side of the
switch with ignition ON condition.

The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be • For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the
automatically adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle behind vehicle
you by pressing the anti-glare auto adjustment switch.
While pressing the switch, its corresponding indicator comes on. 8.3.2 Manual Type (if equipped)
Pressing the switch once more turns off the indicator and
deactivates the function.
• Under the following conditions, automatic anti-glare function

may not operate properly
• When the rear vehicle’s headlamp is not beamed directly to
theinside rearview mirror’s sensor
• When the rear window has a dark tinted glass
• When the gear selector lever is in the R position, automatic
You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pulling
antiglare function will be cancelled to obtain the best
its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other vehicles
rearview
behind you
• For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion
When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night,
adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and
• The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a
not allow it to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally clear rear view.
get it in your eyes, flush with water and see your doctor

8.4 Storage Compartments Luggage Floor Lid at Upper Position (Flat Floor)
8.4.1 Luggage Compartment
In Luggage compartment, there are two levels of lid positions

(Upper and Lower) provided in the rear side trims. Position can be
varied as per required volume of objects (higher and lower). The
default vehicle assembly condition of Luggage Floor Lid at Lower
Position.
Luggage Floor Lid at Lower Position
This position can be used during Flat Floor condition (Second row
seat folded condition)
For using this position the spacer which is available below tool kit
organiser to be removed and fixed on the top of the organiser as
per the illustration.
During normal driving condition luggage floor lid position should be

at the lower position.
In this position luggage floor lid will be rested on toolkit organiser
above the spare wheel directly.

Flat Floor Position Fixing Procedure Rotate the Spacer tool tray (Which is provided along with Tool kit
organiser at the bottom) anti-clockwise direction to remove from
Lift and remove the luggage floor lid as shown in the illustration. Tool kit organiser.
Remove the tool kit organiser from the spare wheel. Fix the Spacer Tool tray on top of the tool kit organiser as shown in
the illustration.

Match the Locator in Spacer tool tray to be inserted in the hole

on Tool kit organiser (Identified with arrow mark) to place
Spacer tool tray on top of Tool kit organiser.
In this position to carry the light weight objects like, Cycle, TV and
similar size of objects.
Follow the reverse procedure to relocate the normal position.
Then refix the Tool kit organiser to the spare wheel and alter the
Luggage floor lid at the upper position.
Do not place the Luggage Floor Lid at the top position with out
keeping proper support (spacer) at the bottom which is
To get the flat floor position when rear seat is in folded condition provided along with toolkit organiser. Otherwise there is a risk
with proper support at the bottom of Luggage Floor Lid. of breakage of Luggage floor Lid, if it is loaded with out spacer
support
Maximum loading condition of Luggage floor lid at lower

position is 60Kgs.

8.4.2 Front Storage 8.4.3 Sun Glass Holder
Roof mounted sun glass holder is an integral part of the front

interior lamp.
The front storage is located under the front centre panel. You can
use it for small items.
Press the lid to release the latch and lower the holder. It is
strategically positioned to be accessed easily by both the driver and
front passenger.
Be cautious of items falling or interrupting the control of the
gear selector lever
Do not access the sun glass holder while you are driving. It may
distract your concentration and could lead to an accident.

8.4.4 Glove Box 8.4.5 Centre Storage
The glove box is located just below the Left side of Instrument panel. The centre storage is mounted upon the glove box.
To open, gently pull the lever and lower the lid. To close the glove
box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.
It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along with A cold/hot beverage placed in the storage may be thrown out
the Owner’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when needed. or cause a burn. Use the cup holder for beverages.
There is also a pen holder inside the glove box for convenience.
To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a

sudden stop, glove box lids should be kept closed when the
vehicle is in motion.

8.4.6 Console Storage
By pressing up the console knob, you can use the compartment in

the console storage.
You can use the console storage by lifting up the console lid with
The console storage can be used as an armrest for both the driver
the knob.
and the passenger.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage

compartment.
Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since
they can move around in the compartment while driving.
Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter
in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may
explode and cause a fire.
You can store a max. 10-inch mobile device (Galaxy tab, iPad, etc.)
in the centre console storage.

8.4.7 Front Cup Holder/Rear Cup Holder and Armrest Rear cup holder and armrest (if equipped)
(if equipped)
Front Cup Holder:
The cup holders are located on both the left and right side trims.
The cup holder located in the floor console between the front seats,
It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed or have a lid. Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.
Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage

that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled liquids
can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any
spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause a loss of
control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

8.4.8 Bottle Holder 8.4.9 Seat Back/Magazine Pocket

Bottle holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can The seat back pockets are located on the back of the front seats
use them to store maps, papers, small books, bottles, etc. for holding lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.
Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.

To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat
back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back
pockets.

8.4.10 Assist Grip and Coat Hook Coat Hook
Assist Grip The second row outboard passenger seats grip handles feature a
coat hook for hanging your coat, shirts, etc.
Foldable grip handles are provided above the front (passenger only)
and second row outboard seats.
Hang lightweight articles only. Hanging excess/bulky weight/

items may cause breakage of the hook and inconvenience to
the passengers.

8.5 Sun Visor Ticket Holder
8.5.1 Sun Visor and Ticket Holder

Sun Visor
Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the front or
side windows.
To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.
To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it downward,
unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.
Tickets and cards can be stored.
• Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror or ticket holder

on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by
taking your attention away or blocking your view
• Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in move

8.5.2 Vanity Mirror and Lamp (if equipped) 8.6 Horn
Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn.

The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.
Vanity Mirror and Lamp
Swing the sun visor down and open the cover to reveal the mirror,
then the lamp will come on.
Do not adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is in motion.

Ticket Holder
Tickets and cards can be stored.

8.7 Sunroof (if equipped) • When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely
close the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle
Sunroof Switch theft. Or, the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains
or snows
The sunroof cover opens and closes manually.
• When the sunroof is slid to its complete open position, the
wind buffet phenomenon can increase. If this happens,
adjust by opening the sunroof or only open two-thirds of the
sunroof by using only the first step of the opening system
• When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions
before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped
• Clean up the circumference of sunroof regularly. Otherwise,
operating the sunroof may cause a noise due to foreign
material and dirt
• Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a
car wash or rain may lead to water entering
• Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition • Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The
key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), dusts or particles entered can cause operating problems
operating the sunroof repeatedly with the engine turned off • If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any
will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof while the cargo is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the
engine is running sunroof. If you are required to operate the sunroof, carefully
• When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the check that the roof rack system does not interfere with the
switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a sunroof and it is safe to open the sunroof
malfunction. Especially in winter, never operate the sunroof if
moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced

pushing up and holding the sunroof switch again, the sunroof is

completely opened (second step).
• Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any
part of his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. Push up and hold the switch: manual sliding open
There is a risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped The sunroof is opened as long as pushing up the switch.
suddenly
Close
• Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand,
finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a
risk of personal injury or even death
8.7.1 Sunroof Sliding Operation

Open: 2-Step Opening
Pull down the switch briefly: auto sliding close

When pulling down the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is
automatically closed completely. To stop the sunroof, pull or push
the switch at desired position while moving.
Pull down and hold the switch: manual sliding close
The sunroof is closed as long as pulling down the switch.
Push up the switch briefly: 2-step auto sliding open
When pushing up the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is
automatically opened by two-third of its travel (first step). When

8.7.2 Sunroof Tilting Operation Anti-Pinch Function (if equipped)
Tilt UP To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the sliding
sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the sunroof
The rear side of the sunroof is tilted up when pulling down the when an object is trapped.
sunroof switch with the sunroof closed.
Tilt DOWN
The rear side of the sunroof is tilted down when pushing up the
• This safety function is available for the auto sliding sunroof
close
sunroof switch with the sunroof tilted up.
• The anti-Pinch function is deactivated just before the sunroof
closes
• Sunroof safety function is supplemental and not always
operable depending on circumstances (e. g. any electrical
device in the vehicle, etc.), therefore, the driver should check
safety at all times before operating the sunroof

• The sunroof does not completely close or open by operating the

switch once
When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions
before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped. • The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not stop
even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof
Do not stick out any part of your body out of the sunroof even in
stationary. • The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open or
tilt up
Sunroof Open Warning Buzzer
• The sunroof does not work
When opening the driver’s door after the ignition key is removed Recalibrating the Sunroof Starting Point
with the sunroof open, the buzzer will sound to alert you that the
sunroof is opened. The buzzer will automatically turn off when If you pull and hold the Close switch for 5 seconds while the rear
closing the door. After this, the buzzer will not sound even though side of the sunroof is tilted up, the sunroof starting point will be
the door is opened again. recalibrated with a thumping sound.
Wind Buffeting If the sunroof still does not operate properly after recalibrating the
start point, bring your vehicle in to a Authorised Mahindra Service
When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open at a
center for an inspection.
certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears or
hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens
because of an influx in air through the window or sunroof and its
resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or
sunroof.
Battery Discharge or Power Failure while Operating Sunroof
If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery or

power failure, you need to re-calibrate the starting point of the
sunroof. In addition, the following cases need the recalibration.

8.7.3 Sunroof Service Checking Procedure
• Open the Sunroof Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it
manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain
hose.
• Check all 4 Rail channel corners for mud or Dust/Leaf present

in it
• After cleaning of all visible particles, blow air into drain hose
channel area to clean hose for mud in this area
• Now pour 1 litre of water in rain channel and check if water is
draining or not
If water is not draining kindly contact the Authorised Mahindra

Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.
• Move the leafs/Dust to centre of rain channel and then remove

it by hand

8.8 Interior Lamps

A : Spot Lamp Switch
Interior lamps comprise front/rear roof lamps, ambience lamps (Passenger’s)
and ignition key ring illumination. These lamps can be used for an B : Main Room Lamp Switch (Auto
illuminated entry. In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) Mode)
and ignition key ring illuminate when any of the doors are opened.
C : Spot Lamp Switch (Driver’s)
Once all doors are closed, the interior lamps switch OFF.
D: Sunroof Switch
8.8.1 Front Roof Lamp

The front roof lamps are located in the roof console above the 8.8.2 Centre Room Lamp
interior rearview mirror.
The centre room lamp comes on when pressing in this switch. It
The roof lamp can be switched ON pressing the ON switch A & C. goes out when pressing in the switch again. However, if the main
Press the switch again to switch OFF the roof lamp. Also the lamp room lamp switch is in Auto/door position, this lamp comes on/
goes off once the Lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed and the same goes off when opening/closing a door.
will be ON again when it is un-lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed
It can not be switched off independently in auto mode
For Auto mode - Auto Mode switch (B) is in pressed condition the
roof lamp will be ON when any of the doors are opened.
And the lamp will go off once the doors are closed.

8.8.3 Glove Box Lamp (if equipped)
This lamp is located inside the Glove box.

It will get switched ON when Glove box is opened and switch OFF
when it is closed only if parking lamp is ON condition.
8.8.5 Luggage Room Lamp Switch
8.8.4 Door Courtesy Lamp (if equipped)

The door ajar lamp is present in both front doors. The respective
door lamp illuminates when that particular door is open or
improperly locked.
The luggage room lamp turns on when the tailgate opens, and it
turns off when the tailgate closes.
The door ajar lamp illuminates even in the vehicle switched OFF
condition with the ignition key removed.

8.10 Power Outlet (12V)

Do not open the tailgate for an extended period of time while The 12V power supply socket is provided for power take OFF.
the luggage room lamp switch is pressed in with the engine Electrical equipment/appliances like mobile phone charger,
stopped. The battery could be discharged. cigarette lighter, etc. can be used in the outlets.
8.9 Microphone
The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ACC or
ON positions. It is recommended to use the power sockets
when the engine is ON to avoid battery drain.
The power outlet are located in the compartment below the centre
bezel switch bank.
The microphone is located on the roof above driver side.

The microphone is used when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front
speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth®

phone in the system.

To avoid serious injury: • Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger
compartment are closed
• Close the power outlet cap when not in use
• Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet
• When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the • Use the power outlets only when the engine is running.
manufacturer's instruction manual Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the
• Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while electric device. Using the power outlets when the engine is
sleeping OFF or leaving the electric device plugged in for many hours
may cause the battery to drain
• Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet
• Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories
• Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V
• Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the • Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference
power outlet when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may
Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other
way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, electronic systems or devices in your vehicle
which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or
personal injuries. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for
any necessary repairs.
To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical

appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:
• Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving
• Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling,
falling or overheating

8.11 AUX and USB Ports 8.12 Exterior Lamps
The AUX and USB ports are provided on the centre switch bezel 8.12.1 Lighting Control Stalk
below the infotainment control.
The lighting control stalk is located on the right hand side of the
AUX (A) / USB (B) can be used as an input to the music system. steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.
You can connect iPods, USB memory sticks, etc. as an input and
listen to the music through the vehicle speakers. It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp
beam selection, high beam flashing, front/rear fog lamps and turn
USB (C) can be used only for charging. signals when the ignition switch is ON.
A AUX Jack B RH USB Port Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk
LH Charging USB Ports (if clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to “O” on the switch to
C equipped) switch OFF all lamps.
It is recommended to connect an input device only when the

vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while
driving may distract your attention and lead to accidents.

8.12.2 Turn Signals • After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will
automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF all the
lamps
A : Turn Signal - Left If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster
B : Turn Signal - Right than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the
turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb
immediately.
Lane changing:
Taking a Right Turn : To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or
• Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and
The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the right release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.
flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear &
The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control
ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards
stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.
right
After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically
return to the neutral position switching OFF all the lamps. 8.12.3 Parking Lamp ON
Taking a Left Turn : Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk
clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the “1st detente”
• Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left position on the switch to switch ON the parking lamps.
turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the
left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear
& ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards
left

8.12.4 Head Lamp “AUTO” Function
The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination

lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the The auto light and rain sensor senses the ambient illumination
parking lamp is switched ON. intensity to determine the timing for turning the head lamps and tail
lamps on or off automatically when the light switch is set to “AUTO”.
Park/Position Lamps will not be switched off automatically.

User has to turn it off manually. • Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax
Park Lamp Warning Buzzer • On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use
manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies
When opening the driver’s door after the ignition key is removed
depending on the climate, season, or circumstances
with the park lamp ON, the buzzer will sound to alert you that the
park lamp is ON opened. The buzzer will automatically turn off when • Any aftermarket tanning film or spray may cause the lighting
closing the door or park lamp is OFF. After this, the buzzer will not system to malfunction
sound even though the door is opened again.
• Authorised Mahindra Dealer recommends you to use this
function restrictively only at sunrise or sunset

• Usually turn the head or tail lights on or off manually 8.12.6 Head Lamp Low/High Beam
• Turn on the headlamps when passing through a dark area Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down
such as a tunnel (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high beam
• On a gloomy day, do not rely on this automatic function. But or lift/pull the lighting control stalk up towards the steering wheel
turn the head or tail lights on or off manually to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head lamp high beam, the
high beam tell-tale lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates
• When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, indicating high beam option selected.
and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a
normal phenomenon recognising the automatic setting
8.12.5 Head Lamp ON

A : Low Beam
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk B : High Beam
clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the “2nd detente”
position on the switch to switch ON the head lamps.
8.12.7 Head Lamp Flash

Pull the lighting control stalk (from the head lamp low beam
Switch Position Vehicle Loading Condition
position) towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the
head lamp high beam. The head lamp flash works only when the Driver/Driver with Front Passenger
0
head lamp is OFF or in low beam position.
1 Driver + Front passenger + Second row occupied
8.12.8 Head Lamp Levelling System
2 All seats occupied
When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an
upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with
3 luggage at extreme rear side
lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum
inconvenience to other road users.
Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay load as
To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling advised in the table.
switch. This switch is located on the right side of the steering
column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has four
positions marked as 0, 1, 2 & 3.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is
switched ON.

8.12.9 Centre Switch Cluster 8.12.10 Rear Defogging
There are heating grids on the tailgate glass. Be careful not to

damage the heating grids while cleaning inside of the tailgate
window.
Do not coat the tailgate window with commercial anti-glare film.

When the metal anti-glare film and two-tone anti-glare film is
used, the sensitivity of the heating grids can be deteriorated.
If any transmitter or receiver is close to the antenna, it can
interfere with the communication of the antenna.
Sl. No. Switches
A Tailgate and outside rearview mirror heated glass switch
B PAB OFF indicator* The heating element of the glass is activated only when the
C Rear seat belt indicator* engine is running. When the glass heater switch is pressed, the
heating elements of the rear windshield and outside rearview
D Hazard warning flasher switch
mirrors are turned on simultaneously.
E TRIP/RESET switch (LCD display switch)
F Steering Mode Control switch 8.12.11 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) (if equipped)
* - if equipped
To enable DRL:
• When rear passenger buckles to seat belt, then indication will go • In daytime whenever the engine is in running condition and park
OFF, otherwise it will be blink for 33 seconds switch is in OFF position, DRL is enabled
• When PAB switch in ON position, then Passenger airbag De-
activation status will be OFF

To disable DRL:
• Whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp is
ON, DRL will get switch to park mode
If customer doesn’t want the DRL to be ON, he can disable

through infotainment settings. Refer to Infotainment e-manual.
8.12.12 Fog Lamps (if equipped)
Fog lamps are to be used along with head lamp low beam, to
improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions. Fog lamps will turn ON only if parking lamp is ON.
8.12.13 Front Fog Lamps ON 8.12.14 Fog Lamps OFF
To switch ON the front fog lamps, first switch ON the parking lamps,
rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise
aligning the front fog lamp icon to the “arrow” on the inner fixed
stalk as shown.
The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates the
operation status.
The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates

even if fog lamp is not fitted in the vehicle.

Align the “O” of inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk to 8.12.16 Follow-Me Home (FMH) (if equipped)
the “arrow” mark on the inner fixed stalk as shown to switch OFF
the fog lamps. This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the
vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is
turned ON for about 20 secs. assisting the passengers to find their
8.12.15 Rear Fog Lamp way.
To switch ON the rear fog lamps, first switch ON the parking lamps, To activate FMH:
rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise
aligning the rear fog lamp icon to the “arrow” on the inner fixed • Switch OFF the parking lamps
stalk as shown. • Remove the ignition key
The rear fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates the • Press the RKE lock button 2 times
operation status.
• Head lamp switch ON for 20 secs. unless cancelled by UNLOCK
signal
To extend the FMH feature further for 20 secs., press RKE LOCK
button once. This FMH extension can be availed for maximum 3
minutes from the first activation.
With FMH mode ON; First LOCK signal received from RKE will lock
the doors and subsequent LOCK signal is used to toggle the head
lamp ON and OFF.
To deactivate FMH:
• Switch ON the parking lamps
• Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position
The rear fog lamps can be switched ON only along with the
front fog lamps. • Press the RKE unlock button once

• Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE will
automatically unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle
the head lamp ON and OFF.
With FMH mode ON, if UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE;
the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also,
the doors are unlocked and vehicle disarmed. 8.12.18 Hazard Warning Lamp
The hazard warning lamp switch is located in the centre bezel

8.12.17 Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV) (if equipped) switch bank on the instrument panel.
LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 secs. To turn the hazard warning lamp ON, push the switch in. All the turn
helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely and signal lamps flash. The instrument cluster turn indicator lamps also
comfortably at night. flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.
LMV is activated:
• Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times
LMV is de-activated:
• Switch ON the parking lamps
• Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position
• Press the RKE lock button once
• Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF
automatically
Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to
To extend the LMV feature further for 20 secs., press RKE warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.
UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for
maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.

8.13 Windshield Wipers

The turn lamps do not work when the hazard warning lamps 8.13.1 Wiper Control Stalk
are operational.
8.12.19 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp A : Flick-Wipe (MIST)

B : Off
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in
C : Intermittent (INT)/Auto
vehicle stationary condition.
D : Low Speed (LO)
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during E : High Speed (HI)
panic braking condition to indicate oncoming traffic.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate
event of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such a
scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be 8.13.2 Wiper Off
turned off by operating Hazard switch (Off to On) or Ignition reset
(Ignition Off and On) The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral
position (B).
8.13.3 Flick-Wipe (Mist)
Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to
operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk
towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk
automatically comes back to position (B) when released.

8.13.4 Intermittent (INT) 8.13.7 High Speed Wiping
Intermittent (INT) wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the
pushed down to position C. In the INT mode, the wiper operates on wiper at a fixed high speed.
preset intervals.
The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper
speed intensity rotary switch (F). The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition
is in “ON” position.
8.13.5 Auto Mode (if equipped)
8.13.8 Wipe/Wash
Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed
down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from
rain intensity. any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid from
front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield.
The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer spray is
speed intensity rotary switch (F). stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer
fluid.
When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will
automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from
the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.
8.13.6 Low Speed Wiping

Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the
wiper at a fixed low speed.

When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:

After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their
bottom position.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less
than or equal to 5 secs., then the wiper will continue in the
Intermittent mode.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is
more than 5 secs., then a further single wipe will be performed
5 secs. after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last
wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe. AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in
OFF mode.
8.13.9 AUTO Wash (if equipped)
8.13.10 Rear Wiper-Low Mode
When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid from
front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield
for 2 seconds. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times
After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON
for 1.5 seconds and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align 8.13.12 Rear Wash
the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate
the rear wiper in low mode. In this mode, the wiper operates on
preset intervals of 6 seconds.
8.13.11 Rear Wiper-High Mode
The rear windshield wash & wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long

as the stalk end is turned/rotated to the rear wash position.
Wiping will continue for few secs. after releasing the stalk end
switch.
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align If you switch OFF the ignition before switching OFF the wiper,
the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch ON the
the rear wiper continuously . ignition and move wiper stalk to 'MIST' position to return the
wipers to the park position, provided the wiper stalk is in OFF
position.

In the rear, one nozzle with triple adjustable washer jets are
provided for the rear windshield wash. Adjust the nozzle to direct
Using a windshield washer in freezing temperatures could be the washer jet to hit the middle of rear windshield using a pin. Rear
dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield, and windshield washer fluid is supplied from front washer reservoir
block your vision resulting in an accident. If you operate your located in the Engine compartment.
vehicle in temperatures below 40 deg C, use washer fluid with
anti-freeze protection.
• Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may

lead to scratches on the glass
• It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield
glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass
before using the wiper to avoid damage to the wiper blades
and glass
• Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 8.14 Engine Stop/Start System (ESS)
10 secs. or when the reservoir is empty
8.13.13 Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear
There are two nozzles with triple adjustable washer jets in the front
(on the bonnet). Using a pin, the eye ball jets can be adjusted
precisely for direction. Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle
of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the
complete width of the windshield.

8.14.1 Overview of the ESS System better fuel efficiency. Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the
Engine Stop/Start button in the central bezel switch bank. The LED
Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” the on the button indicates the status of the button.
engine when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in turn gives a

8.14.2 How does the ESS Work? • Current status of the engine is idling
• Vehicle speed is zero
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within
your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic junction • Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released
due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system
functions: • Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition
• The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the neutral • Engine is warm. This is an extra precaution to ensure safe
gear and the clutch pedal is released working of the engine
• The ‘ESS’ lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine • Gear is in neutral
is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically For auto start to happen, the following major conditions are to be:
after a specific time period
• Vehicle should have been stopped by the ESS system
• The ‘ESS’ lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating
the engine was stopped by the ESS system • Gear lever is in the neutral position
• Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and the • Vehicle speed is zero
engine starts immediately • ESS switch is in active mode
• The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine • Bonnet should be closed
has started again and you are ready to drive on
• Clutch pedal is fully pressed (to restart)
For auto stop to happen, the following major conditions are to be
met:
• ESS system is activated using the selection switch
ESS will be operational when the engine coolant temperature
• Bonnet is fully closed reaches a minimum operating range.
• Fuel and Engine coolant temperature should be within the limits
• In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 2 kmph at
least once

8.14.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) 5. Are there any safety precautions to be followed?
1. What is the advantage of this system? Yes, when the engine is turned OFF at traffic signals/jams with
heavy electrical loads like head lamp or AC switched ‘ON’. If the
The ESS system aids in attaining better fuel efficiency of your duration of such stops are long, it is recommended to keep the
vehicle and thus reducing your running costs. However, the engine ‘ON’ and the ESS system in ‘OFF’ position.
mileage improvement will depend upon various parameters
6. What is to be done, if I don’t want the system to stop my
such as prevailing traffic, driving patterns, etc.
engine at traffic signals/jams?
2. What are the other advantages of this system?
The system can be turned OFF by switching OFF the Stop/
• Since the engine is switched off during traffic signals/jams, Start selection switch.
considerable amount of carbon dioxide release to the 7. Whether the AC will function, if the engine is switched off?
atmosphere is avoided. This reduces global warming and
thus provides us with a sustainable planet to live in No, the AC will not work. However, the blower will be in
operation when the ignition is ON.
• Ability to restart the engine by pressing the clutch pedal
8. What will happen if I keep the clutch continuously pressed at
• Reduces noise pollution at traffic signals traffic signals/jams?
3. Is it possible to start the engine through the clutch pedal for The system will not stop the engine if the clutch is continuously
the first time? pressed since it indicates the driver’s intention of moving the
No, the engine can be cranked only with the ignition key for the vehicle immediately.
first time. If the engine is stopped automatically by the system, 9. When the battery charge is low, whether the engine will be
only then it is possible to start the engine through the clutch. switched off?
4. Whether the system will get activated as soon as the engine is If the battery charge drops below a certain level, the system
started the first time with the ignition key? will not stop the engine so as to preserve the battery from
The system will get activated only after the completion of further draining.
engine temperature dependent warm up period which may 10. Whether I will be able to operate the engine with the normal
extend up to 15 minutes. This is to ensure better performance ignition key?
of the engine in terms of fuel economy and durability.

Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is always possible. Yes, if all other conditions except battery charge are met, the
11. Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in gear? ESS lamp blinks faster for 7.5 seconds and the engine does
not switch OFF.
The vehicle will not start or stop automatically in gear to
ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral position of the
gear shift lever.
12. Whether the system will stop my engine in moving traffic?
No, the engine will be stopped only when the vehicle speed is
zero continuously for more than 2 seconds.
13. Whether the audio system will be switched OFF, when the
engine shuts down?
No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and you can
continue to enjoy the music.
14. Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the clutch pedal is
pressed?
No, when the engine is running, the starter motor will not
attempt to re-crank.
15. If any component involved in the system fails, what will happen?
The system has a built-in diagnostic module which understands
the failure and immediately goes to bypass mode, In the bypass
mode the engine can be turned ON and OFF with ignition key
as usual.
16. Are there any indications to show that engine does not stop
due to poor battery charge state?

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES
9 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES

W8/W8 (O) W4/W6
A Tachometer G Odometer
B Tripmeter H Temperature Gauge
C Telltales I Steering Mode Control
D Gear Shift Indicator J TDMS*
E Speedometer K Door Alert
F Fuel Gauge * if equipped

9.1 Tachometer 9.2 Speedometer
Diesel Petrol
The tachometer indicates the real-time engine speed in thousands The speedometer indicates the real-time road surface speed of the
of RPM (revolutions per minute). Each division is 500 RPM. vehicle in kilometres per hour.
Operating the engine at very high RPM may lead to excessive
engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain steady engine speed
below 2500 RPM and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly. The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used. If
the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the
factory, the speedometer might not display the correct road
Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause surface speed and distance travelled.
severe engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the
engine which is not covered by warranty.

9.3 Odometer
The odometer records and displays the total distance travelled in

km. Odometer cannot be reset.
Trip meter has to be reset whenever battery is disconnected

due to various reasons.
Else A v e r a g e S p e e d and D r i v i n g T i m e may not match with trip
9.4 Trip Meter value.
Select TRIP A / TRIP B in screen by pressing T r i p switch in centre 9.5 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
console. Long press of set switch will reset trip information,
average speed and driving time. The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the
ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine
Trip A Trip B coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes
Variants in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.
Min Max Min Max
W4/W6 0 999.9 0 9999 If gauges is showing 7 or more than 7 bars, it represents that
W8/W8(O) 0 9999.9 0 9999.9 engine is overheating. This will also be notified through blinking or
continuously ON Engine high temperature lamp.

When the fuel level reaches the reserve, the last bar will be
displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 8 litres). when the
Never remove the Degassing tank cap when the engine is hot. fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display and low
The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to fuel telltale will be blinking . The amount of fuel required to fill the
skin/eyes causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a small
down before adding coolant to the reservoir. amount of reserve fuel always remains in the tank.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the
fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the
This will lead to damage of engine components and engine last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient
seizure. fuel, contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
9.6 Fuel Level Gauge

When all the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing,
The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer at the
It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank. F indicates the earliest.
tank is full (42 litres), E indicates the tank is empty.

9.7 W8/W8(O) Instrument Cluster screen flow

9.8 W4/W6 instrument cluster screen flow

9.9 Clock Screens (if equipped) 9.10 Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped)
In W4/W6, Select Clock in the screen by pressing T r i p switch on This Screen shows the outside ambient temperature.
the centre console.
Steps to set time Ch anging the Units (W8/W8(O))
1. Long press set switch to entering time setting. First digit will be Once you reach to OAT screen, Long Press the SET switch to
blinking. change the units. You can choose between degree Celsius and
degree Fahrenheit.
2. Short pressing “SET” will change the value one at the time. Long
press will change the value to zero. Changing the Units (W4/W6)
3. Use trip switch to move to next digit. 1. Once you reach time and OAT screen, long press set switch to
enter into setting mode. In setting mode, temperature will be
blinking.
For high end, Clock is in sync with infotainment. Any change in 2. Press set switch to change units.
infotainment will reflect on cluster.

9.11 Drive Information (if equipped) 9.11.2 Average Speed (if equipped)
In Drive Information, Drive Time and Average Speed will get Average Speed is calculated based on the total distance covered
displayed in screen. and time taken from the start of this trip cycle.
Select Drive Information in screen by pressing T r i p switch on the This display can be selected by toggling T r i p switch on the centre
centre console. console.
9.11.1 Drive Time
Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.
Once Drive Information is selected, Drive Duration is displayed on
the Screen.

9.12 Gear Recommendation 9.13 Fuel Computer
Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive In Fuel computer, Average Fuel Economy (AFE), Distance to Empty
the vehicle. (DTE) and Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) will get displayed in
screen.
Based on the various parameters, it will also suggest to change the
gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommendation. Select Fuel computer in screen by pressing T r i p switch on the
centre console.
Display
Operating Condition
W4/W6 W8/W8(O) 9.13.1 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)
UP/DOWN arrow Once Fuel computer is selected, Average Fuel Efficiency is displayed
along with numeral on the Screen.
recommends shifting
to that gear. AFE is calculated based on the Last AFE reset cycle.

9.13.2 Distance to Empty (DTE) Instantaneous Fuel Economy is calculated based on your current
driving pattern. More bars on display means vehicle is consuming
Distance to Empty is the approximate distance that can be covered less fuel, less number of bars implies it is consuming more fuel.
with the available fuel. This display can be selected by toggling T r i p
switch on the centre console.
9.14 Digital Speedo Meter (if equipped)
9.13.3 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle numerically. It
provides immersive experience by having option to switch off the
lights of Speedometer and Tachometer.
Turning the lights off
Once you reach to Digital Speedometer screen, Long Press the SET
switch to turn the lights OFF. Long press the SET switch to turn ON
the lights again.

9.15 Cluster Setting (if equipped) Inside Setting Menu
Long pressing the SET switch will take you inside the settings
option. Here you can change illumination, mood ring colour for day
and night conditions, also you can enable or disable the welcome
chime. Use trip switch to browse through options and set switch to
enter sub menus.
Colour Setting
• Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings
• Long press SET switch to enter settings
• Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select colour
setting using set switch
In colour setting, you can choose from White, Red, Yellow, Sky blue
and Blue colour for both day and night conditions.
This allows you to change the settings related to cluster. This

screen also comes with a timeout. You have to stop vehicle for
changing the settings.
Some setting might not be available as per configuration of the

vehicle

Illumination Control 2. Long press SET switch to enter settings.

Illumination control feature allows you to change the brightness of 3. Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select
the Instrument cluster according to light and weather conditions. It “Brightness” option using SET Switch.
automatically detects the day and night conditions according to 4. Adjust the Brightness level using SET Switch.
park lamp input. Also you can customise the illumination setting so
that it doesn’t hurt your eyes.
It provides 6 level illumination control each for day and night
conditions.
The default brightness after the B+ power is supplied is level 5.
Over speed Flash (if equipped)
How to Change Illumination Set tin g (W4/W6)

1. Once you reach the illumination setting screen, long press SET
switch to enter into setting mode.
2. Use SET switch to change brightness. When the vehicle speed is higher than the speed configured, the
mood ring flashes. Flashing of the mood ring can be turned OFF/
How to Change Illumination Set tin g (W8/W8(O)) ON using this setting.
1. Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find
settings.

1. Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find 2. Long press SET switch to enter settings.
settings. 3. Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Turn ON/OFF
2. Long press SET switch to enter settings. “Welcome Chime” option using SET Switch.
3. Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select “Over
speed Flash” option using SET Switch. 9.16 Mood Lighting (if equipped)
4. Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select desired
option using SET Switch. For W8/W8 (O) Type
Over speed flash (if equipped) – Be safe than waiting for the
warning to come, someone’s wait might get longer
Welcome Chime
Mood lighting is especially designed to enhance your driving

experience. It allows to customise the colour of the inner ring as per
your mood.(refer section colour setting for changing colour of mood
ring)
This ring will also notify you when you are over-speeding (if
Welcome chime can be enabled/disabled using this setting. If the equipped). Colour of the ring will change to red.
box is checked means welcome chime is enabled else disabled.
1. Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find
settings.

9.17 Vehicle Condition Related Warning (W8/W8 (O) Display Operating Conditions
only)
Following are the warning information available: This message comes when cruise mode is
turned OFF manually using switch.
Display Operating Conditions
This message is displayed when the engine

check warning lamp is turned ON and engine This message comes when ECO mode is
has been running. turned ON.
When the engine oil pressure warning light is This message comes when ECO mode is
ON and engine has been running. turned OFF.
This message comes on when the ESP system This message comes when brake fluid level is
is faulty, and engine has been running. low and engine has been running.
This message comes when cruise mode is This message comes when vehicle has crossed
turned ON manually using switch. scheduled service limit.

Display Operating Conditions Display Operating Conditions
This message comes when water is detected

This message comes on when the tail lamps
in fuel filter and engine has been running. It is
are ON with the ignition in the "OFF" state.
applicable for diesel variants only.
This message comes when you are driving

This message comes when passenger airbag vehicle above configured high speed
switch has been turned OFF. parameter.
This message comes when fuel level warning

This message comes when you try to move the
lamp is ON or Blinking and engine has been
vehicle when park brake is still engaged.
running.
This message comes when you try to change

settings while driving the vehicle (i.e., vehicle
This message comes when either of driver or speed is greater than 2kmph). This message
passenger (if occupied) seatbelt is unbuckled. comes with a timeout of 5 secs, after that is
goes to TRIP A screen through settings
screen.
This message comes when engine
temperature high telltale is ON and engine has
been running. Indicates that engine
temperature is high.

9.17.1 Welcome and Good Bye Screens
Display Operating conditions Remarks
Pre-WELCOME sound:
When the ignition is turned on while
When the driver's door is opened after the theft [WELCOME] is displayed.
deterrent mode is deactivated
- WELCOME sound with logo is activated for the
WELCOME sound with logo and multicolored time remaining.
light in mood ring:
- The screen is changed to System Check screen
When the open driver's door is closed after the when the ignition is turned on.
theft deterrent mode is deactivated.
When the ignition is turned off. Goodbye comes

with animation.
Performs system check once for 3 seconds

when the ignition is turned on.

9.18 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)
Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle. It tells you about
the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle. TDMS works only when vehicle speed is zero and
parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.
W4/W6 W8/W8(O) Operating Conditions
Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0

to level 5) depending on the alignment
degree when the ignition switch is turned to
"ON" position from "OFF" position
Working conditions:
1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking
brake engaged.
2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is
in neutral and clutch is not engaged.

9.19 Steering Mode Control Alerts
Display
Mode Operating conditions
W4/W6 W8/W8 (O)
Warning indicates that current steering

mode is set to Comfort. This warning is
Comfort triggered when user press the Steering
Mode Control switch on the center
console.

mode is set to Normal. This warning is
Normal triggered when user press the Steering
console.

mode is set to Sport. This warning is
Sport triggered when user press the Steering
console.

9.20 Smart Key Alerts
Refer PKE section of the owner’s manual
9.21 Steering Lock Alerts (for W8/W8 (O) only) Operating Conditions
Operating Conditions
The message is displayed if the system check-
up is required since the ESCL system is
This is a temporary malfunction of ESCL and malfunctioning.
the message is displayed if the vehicle needs to
be attempted to start while turning the steering
wheel.
The message is displayed if ESCL coding
checkup is required. (Corresponding signal
transmitted, with no coding between SKM and
This is a temporary malfunction of ESCL and ESCL)
the message is displayed if the steering column
is not locked.

9.22 Door Open Alerts
Display
Operating Conditions
W4/W6 W8/W8(O)
Passenger door open

High: with animation
Low: No animation
Driver door open

Low: No animation
Hood Open
High/Low: Blinking
Rear door (LH) open

Low: No animation

Rear door (RH) open

Low: No animation
Tailgate open
High/Low: Blinking
This message comes on when the sunroof is open with the ignition in the
— "OFF" position. Warning comes with chime.
9.23 Functional Safety Alert
W4/W6 W8/W8(O)
Instrument cluster shall monitor some of the internal parameters and if misbehavior
found it will enable “Contact Dealer” alert.
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately when “Contact Dealer” alert
displayed in cluster.
For W4/W6 Alert will be displayed for 1 mins
For W8/W8 (O) Alert will be displayed for 5 secs

9.24 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster

1 Left Turn Indicator 15 ESP System Warning Lamp*
2 Right Turn Indicator 16 Front Fog Lamp Indicator*
3 Rear Fog Lamp Indicator* 17 Engine Stop/Start Lamp*
4 Cruise Control Indicator* 18 Tiretronics*
5 Water-in-Fuel warning Lamp* 19 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
6 Immobiliser 20 Glow Plug Indicator*
7 ABS Warning Lamp 21 Head Lamp High Beam Lamp
8 Parking Brake ON/Brake Fluid Low Warning Lamp 22 OBD Check Lamp
9 Parking Lamp 23 EPS System Warning Lamp*
10 Airbag Warning Lamp* 24 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
11 HHC malfunction* 25 Check Engine Lamp
12 Door Ajar Warning Lamp 26 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
13 Low Fuel Warning Lamp 27 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
14 ESP OFF Lamp*
*if equipped

9.25 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel is pressed, the
cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes OFF indicating that
9.25.1 Turn Lamps the vehicle is not in cruise mode.
The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster flash If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or
showing the direction indicated by the turn signals. A does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode, there is a
sudden increase in the rate of flashing indicates possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have
failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced as the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
soon as possible.
9.25.4 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped)
9.25.2 Rear Fog Lamp (if equipped)
The water-in-Fuel warning lamp illuminates when the
The rear fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3
rear fog lamp. The rear fog lamp can be switched ON secs. The lamp illuminates when the accumulation of
only when the front fog lamp is ON. water in the fuel filter reaches the maximum permissible limit. The
fuel filter needs to be drained. Contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer.
9.25.3 Cruise Indicator (if equipped)
The cruise control lamp illuminates when the ignition

Do not continue driving the vehicle with the Water-in-Fuel
is switched ON and goes off in about 3secs.
Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel
indicating normal status. The lamp blinks if the
system component damage, which will not be covered by the
accelerator is depressed, while in cruise mode.
limited warranty.
When SET+ button in the steering wheel is pressed, cruise control
is activated and the lamp illuminates indicating the vehicle is in
cruise mode.

9.25.5 Immobiliser 9.25.7 Parking Brake Lamp
Immobiliser Lamp flashes intermittently (few secs. The Parking Brake lamp illuminates when the ignition
frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF and the is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs. The
vehicle security system is armed (when locked using lamp illuminates when Parking brake is engaged or
the RKE). when brake fluid level is low or there is malfunction in EBD. If the
lamp illuminates while driving, do the following:
Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine immobiliser
system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately. • Check if the parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it
• Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the
9.25.6 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp required level
(if equipped)
The ABS malfunction lamp illuminates when the Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the
ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into the
secs. If the ABS malfunction lamp continues to reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minutes.
remain ON or illuminates while driving (and the brake system Any contaminants, impurities or moisture in the brake fluid can
warning lamp is OFF), ABS will not operate. But the brake system affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.
will still operate conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock
during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake
However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are system might not be working properly. The pedal might be
simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. harder to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can
Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle checked take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully and stop the
as soon as possible at an Authorised Mahindra Dealer. vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Authorised
Mahindra Dealer for checks or repairs.

Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately when the

airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction. The airbag
Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON or when you may not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal
suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or unnecessarily, which may
serious injuries. Have your vehicle towed to an Authorised result in personal injury.
Mahindra Dealer.
9.25.10 HHC malfunction (if equipped)
9.25.8 Park Lamp
HHC Malfunction Lamp turn ON if there is any
The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle.
lamp is switched ON through Combination switch.
During ignition OFF, if park lamp is ON with driver
door open, buzzer alert will be audible.
9.25.11 Door Ajar Warning Lamp
9.25.9 Airbag Warning Lamp (if equipped) The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of
the doors including the hood and back door are open
The airbag warning lamp in the instrument cluster during ignition ON. The buzzer chimes when the
illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and tell vehicle speed more than 2 kmph. The lamp and chime goes OFF
tale goes off in 3 secs. irrespective of engine when all the doors are closed properly.
condition. If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash
intermittently, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
9.25.12 Low Fuel Warning Lamp
Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:
When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the
• Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is illuminated.
• Lamp does not illuminate at all Refuel sufficiently and the lamp goes out. If the lamp
continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact an Authorised
• Illuminates while driving Mahindra Dealer.

9.25.13 ESP OFF Lamp (if equipped) 9.25.16 Engine Stop/Start Lamp (if equipped)
The ESP OFF lamp lluminates when the ignition is START The engine Stop/Start lamp illuminates when the
switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs. The A ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3
STOP
ESP OFF lamp illuminates when the ESP has been secs. The Engine Stop/Start lamp flashes when the
switched OFF manually. vehicle/engine is about to stop through the Engine Stop/ Start
System. The lamp illuminates continuously when the vehicle/engine
has been switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On
9.25.14 ESP System Warning Lamp (if equipped) restarting the vehicle / engine again by using the clutch/key, the
lamp goes out.
The ESP system warning lamp illuminates when the
ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3
secs. While driving, if the ESC system warning lamp 9.25.17 Tiretronics (if equipped)
blinks, it indicates that ESP has taken control of the vehicle stability.
If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESP The Tiretronics lamp illuminates when the ignition is
System. Contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer. switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 seconds.
S y s t e m M a l f u n c t i o n : Tiretronics lamp Blink for
9.25.15 Front Fog Lamp (if equipped) approx. 90 sec & then Continuous ON.
The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the S y s t e m W a r n i n g s : Tiretronics lamp Continuous ON.
front fog lamp. The front fog lamp can be switched
ON only when the parking lamp is ON.
S y s t e m m a l f u n c t i o n : System fail to function normally due
to system failure/Sensor failure.
Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle. S y s t e m W a r n i n g : indicated Low/High Tire pressure, High
Temperature, Air Leakage.

9.25.18 Seat Belt Warning Lamp 9.25.21 OBD Check Lamp
The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is
buzzer chimes reminding the driver/co-driver to switched ON and remains ON till the engine is
fasten the seat belt when the ignition is ON. The lamp started indicating normal status. If the lamp remains
will continue to illuminate till the driver/co-driver fastens the seat ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.
belt properly.
There may be a malfunction in:
9.25.19 Glow Plug Indicator (if equipped) • The fuel management system
• The emission control system
Glow plug indicator illuminates when the ignition is
turned ON and Glow plug is activated. It automatically • Systems which affect emissions
goes OFF when the glow plug reaches the required Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact an
temperature. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer if the glow Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
plug lamp does not illuminate with ignition ON or illuminates while
driving.
9.25.22 EPS Warning Lamp (if equipped)
9.25.20 Head Lamp / High Beam Lamp The EPS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition
is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs. The
The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates lamp Indicates malfunction on Electric Power
whenever the head lamps are switched ON to high steering system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
beam or when the head lamp flash is used. immediately.
When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven with increase in

steering effort.

9.25.23 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Switch OFF the engine immediately. Contact the nearest Authorised
Mahindra Dealer for necessary repairs.
The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates
when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF when
the engine is started. If the lamp remains ON even 9.25.25 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop
immediately, check the oil level after 2-3 minutes. If low, add engine The battery charging system warning lamp
oil to the “MAX” level and check status. If problem persists, contact illuminates when the battery is not being charged or
an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately. when there is a malfunction in the alternator.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out
as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp continues to remain
Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning lamp ON even after starting the engine, it is an indication that the battery
ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of is not being charged or there is a malfunction in the alternator.
vehicle control, resulting in an accident and/or serious Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive
personal injury. belt is okay, switch OFF all unnecessary electrical equipment and
recheck. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for further
assistance.
Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning indicator
ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered 9.25.26 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
by the limited warranty. Lamp
For Diesel
9.25.24 Check Engine Lamp
The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp
The check engine lamp illuminates when the ignition flashes when the coolant temperature is above
ENGINE ! is switched ON and goes out in 3 secs. indicating 110ºC. It starts to flash when the temperature reaches 110ºC and
normal status. The lamp blinks or illuminates will be continuously ON with buzzer alert when the temperature
continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system. reaches 114ºC.

For Petrol
The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp flashes when

the coolant temperature is above 111ºC. It starts to flash when the
temperature reaches 111ºC and will be continuously ON with
buzzer alert when the temperature reaches 113ºC.
The bars in the temperature gauge also flash in the same
frequency as the high temperature warning lamp when the above
set temperature thresholds are reached.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine.

This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by
the limited warranty.

PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
10 PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM

10.1 Front/Rear Obstacle Detection System (if equipped)

10.2 Parking Assistance System (PAS) – RPAS & FPAS

(If equipped)
RPAS and FPAS will give proper alerts at vehicle speed less
Parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while than 8kmph.
parking the vehicle in reverse and in front. While Parking, PAS will
detect the obstacles at the rear and front side of the vehicle within
the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-
Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation,
view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors and windshield. The
dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.
PAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the
location of the detected obstacle from the vehicle. The alert sound Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a high-
level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be
shorter the interval between the beeps. damaged.
Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly
10.2.1 Parking Assistance System Sensors affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may
not be accurate.
Front Sensor Location Rear Sensor Location
10.2.2 Driving and Operation
• PAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances mahindra

will accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any
direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage
caused by this system
• System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages
Four PAS sensors are located in the rear bumper and two sensors which are below the ground level
are located in front Bumper to assist driver for hassle free parking

• Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the 10.3 PAS (RPAS & FPAS) Information on Instrument
system Cluster Screen
Activation & De-activation of PAS
• The Vehicle should be in I G N O N state to activate the Parking
assistance system
• RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear engaged
and Hand Brake is disengaged
• RPAS will get deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or
Hand Break is engaged
• FPAS will be activated automatically when Vehicle speed is in
between 1 to 8 kmph and hand break is dis engaged or Clutch is RPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following
pressed, Hand break is disengaged and vehicle is standstill information:
• FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle speed is more than • Left Corner zone indicates obstacle on left side
8kmph or hand brake is engaged • Center zone indicates obstacle on center side
• When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system • Right Corner zone indicates obstacle on right side
starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction
of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the 3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear
obstacles, more display bars illuminated & beeps alerts bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and 3rd bar alone
indicate being distant.
Centre sensor coverage range is more than corner sensor
coverage for RPAS.

FPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following 3. For FPAS alone, disengage Hand brake and drive the vehicle
information: forward with speed limit within 1 to 8kmph
• Left Corner zone indicates obstacle on left side FPAS will be displayed as like below in the instrument cluster
• Right Corner Zone indicates obstacle on the right side screen during obstacle detection.
2 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle front
bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and 2nd bar alone
indicate being distant.
10.4 Operation of PAS
1. Start the vehicle.

2. Change the gear to Reverse (engage reverse gear) and Dis 4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to
engage Hand brake. RPAS & FPAS will be displayed as like obstacles in its path.
below in Instrument Cluster.
The RPAS & FPAS both will be displayed as like below in the
instrument cluster screen during obstacle detection.

5. The Beep sound can be heard from the Cluster speaker. 10.5 Pay Attention
Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle detected by
sensor is closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound 1. If bars in any one of the sides are displayed with ‘?’ marks
will be continuous if any of the obstacle is near the vehicle. and “PAS ERROR” is displayed on instrumental cluster
display, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
6. FPAS warning sound can be disabled using PAS Switch,

available on IP. PAS switch LED will not glow when FPAS 2. If all bars are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “PAS ERROR” is
sound is in active state and will be in ON state when PAS displayed on instrumental cluster display, contact an
sound deactivated. Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system. 5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be
Applicable for all sensors. detected at all. Applicable for all sensors.
4. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind and in 6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a
person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak
front of your vehicle before moving. In some cases, the
reflection or absorption of the waves of the clothes.
display may be not as same as reality due to the installed
sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.

7. The distance indication may move up and down due to 9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since
different sizes of the obstacle at different positions. the ultrasonic waves get reflected away
8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not

be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected 10.6 Limitations of PAS
back to the sensor.
• System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small
objects which are below the bumper level
• System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface,
which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by PAS
• System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the
obstacle
• System may give false alert without obstacles while parking/
reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads
considering it to be an obstacle
• System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is
not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is
overloaded

• System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain • Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false
ground to a slope terrain and vice versa alarm for e. g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners and neon lights
• System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the
bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the • Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large
vehicle is heavily overloaded vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the
vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false
• System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow alarm
and heavy wind conditions
• The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting
it. Some obstacles for example as follows:
10.7 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) – Type
1(if equipped)
– Sharply-angled objects
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver
– Tall or curved curb
while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8kmph.
– Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level) While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of
the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through
– Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The
direction of the vehicle RPAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about
• Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other the location of the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will vary
environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the
detection may be impossible interval between the beeps.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the Activation & de-activation of RPAS
sensor
• The Vehicle should be in I G N O N state to activate the Parking
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected assistance system
when approached, even if they have been detected once
• RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is
engaged and Hand Brake is disengaged

• RPAS will be deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or 10.7.1 Operation of RPAS
Hand Break is engaged.
• When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system 1. Start the vehicle.
starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction 2. Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the
of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the Hand Break for RPAS information on Instrument cluster
obstacles, more display bars illuminated & beeps alerts. screen.
RPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following
information: The RPAS will be displayed as like below in the instrument
cluster screen during obstacle detection.
• Left Corner zone indicates obstacle on left side
• Center zone indicates obstacle on center side
• Right Corner zone indicates obstacle on right side
3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear
bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and bar 3rd bar
alone being distant.
Centre sensor coverage range is more than corner sensor
coverage.
3. Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction

4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to 10.8 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) - Type-
obstacles in its path. 2 (if equipped)
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver
while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 5kmph.
While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of
the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through
the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The
RPAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound about the location of
the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to
the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the
beeps.
Activation & de-activation of RPAS
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker.
Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer • The Vehicle should be in I G N O N state to activate the Parking
(crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous assistance system
if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm. • RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is
engaged and Hand Brake is disengaged
• RPAS will be deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or
Hand Break is engaged
• When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system
starts giving the alert beeps. Closer the obstacles, higher the
frequency of the alert beeps and when obstacle is very near to
the vehicle, alert beeps will be continuous
The frequency of RPAS Alert beeps will increase as the obstacle
comes closer to the vehicle and when the obstacle comes very
close to the vehicle the alert beeps will become continuous

Operation of RPAS
1. Start the vehicle.

2. Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the
Hand Break for RPAS alert beeps.
3. Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction.
4. The alert beeps will become more rapid as the vehicle
approaches the obstacle.
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker.
Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer
(crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous
if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.
Pay Attention:
If Instrument Cluster gives 3 continuous beep alert tone whenever
reverse gear engaged, Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances will

Mahindra accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any
direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused
by this system

REAR VIEW CAMERA (RVC) (if equipped)
11 REAR VIEW CAMERA (RVC) (if equipped) 11.1 Feature Description
Rear View Camera is located under tail gate applique. 11.1.1 Wider Rear View
Rear view camera (RVC) provides a wide 130 Deg Horizontal View
and 105 Deg Vertical View.
It overcomes limitation of IRVM, where ground is visible only after a
distance from vehicle rear. Whereas with the RVC, the ground will
be visible right after 15 cm to 30 cm from Vehicle’s Rear
Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing &

manoeuvring the Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:
• Wider Rear View
• Zoom-In View
• Dynamic Guidelines
• Parking Assistance with Voice and Text Guidance [Parallel &
Perpendicular Parking]

11.1.2 Zoom-In View 11.1.3 Dynamic Guidelines

D y n a m i c G u i d e l i n e s indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with
current steering position.
Press Zoom-In button to view objects closer and press Zoom-Out

button to go back to the normal parking.
This will help the driver in adjusting the steering, towards hitting any
obstacles.
Colour coding on the dynamic lines help in assessing the distance of
obstacle from the vehicles’ rear. In the RVC Video, if Red coloured
section of Dynamic Line falls on a object, then the Object is within 1
metre distance from the vehicle’s rear. Likewise, Yellow indicates 1-
2 mts, Green indicates 2-5 mts.

11.1.4 Parking Assistance with Voice and Text Guidance Angle Parking
The feature assists the driver for parking the vehicle in target Angle parking assistance guides the driver to park the vehicle in a
parking Slot. The feature provides, assistance for Parallel and parking slot perpendicular to the vehicle. Below are the steps to
Angular parking. It assists driver during parking, through visual achieve Angle parking.
overlays as well as voice and text guidance. 1. Choose angle Parking button present on infotainment screen.
Normal Parking
Drive ahead of the parking slot, until it is fully visible. Now select
Unless the user select the angle or parallel Parking buttons on angle parking button. After selection, Infotainment display’s
infotainment then by default, the system will provide Dynamic below screen:
guideline for parking assistance to the driver.

3. Complete Parking
Hold steering in the maximum position and start driving the
vehicle backwards. Once you observe the vehicles’ body, is in
parallel to target parking slot, bring steering to centre position
and continue driving backward until the whole vehicle is in
target parking slot. Parking Completed.
2. Setting the steering angle

Based on the side user prefers to park, either blue or green
arc needs to be taken in to consideration Drive the vehicle,
either forward / backward and ensure that preferred side
arc’s tip is touching the starting edge of target parking slot.
Once done stop the vehicle that preferred side arc’s tip is
touching the starting edge that preferred side arc’s tip is
touching the starting edge that preferred side arc’s tip is
touching the starting edge Turn steering wheel to the
maximum position, Turn steering wheel to the maximum
position, Towards direction of the parking slot. Green/blue
overlay disappears, and the dynamic overlay appears on the
screen

Parallel Parking 2. Setting the steering angle:

Parallel Parking guides the driver to park the vehicle, in a slot Drive the vehicle Forward or Backward and ensure the
parallel to the vehicle. greenish-blue rectangle [consider right rectangle if parking
image slot is on right side and consider left rectangle if parking
1. “Parallel parking” function on infotainment. Refer the below slot is on left side], is placed in the parking slot. Make sure
image. obstacles are not present in the parking slot after the red pole.
The red pole should match with the front/rear bumper of the
parked vehicle.
Ensure, there is enough space(min.3ft) sideways between

your vehicle and the parked vehicle before engaging
reverse.
Drive ahead of the parking slot, until the parking slot is fully
visible. Now select the parallel parking button. After selection,
Infotainment display’s the below screen

• Now start turning the steering wheel towards the direction

in which parking slot is present. A shorter rectangle box will
appear which will change the colours according to the Green/Blue/Red colours in this mode, are for guiding the
steering position. When the box is green, stop turning the vehicle to the parking slot and it would not detect the
steering wheel and hold the position. obstacles or alert the driver in that zone. It is the sole
responsibility of the user to ensure the rear end
obstacles/vehicles which can lead to damage while
parking.
3. Complete Parking
• With current steering position, start moving the vehicle
backward. A green arc line will appear. When the green arc
touches the parking slot end position, stop the vehicle
G r e e n c o l o u r : Represents suitable parking location. You can try

an attempt to park
R e d c o l o u r : Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Your
vehicle may hit the side of the vehicle already parked.
B l u e c o l o u r : Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Final
parking space length needed will be larger than the desired
length of parking space. May lead to wrong vehicle direction
movement.

• Now rotate the steering wheel to maximum in the opposite 4. Voice and Text Guidance during Parking Assistance
direction. Arc is then replaced by dynamic parking line.
Continue backing the vehicle with the help of dynamic
guideline.
• To make the parking assistance user-friendly, voice and text

guidance is given
• Both Text and Voice guidance can be selected or
• When it is observed the vehicles body, is in parallel to target deselected in the following Path, through Infotainment:
parking slot, bring steering to centre position. Continue
driving backward until the whole vehicle is in the target Home ->CarInfo->RVC
parking slot. Parking Completed
• Also, Voice Guidance can be selectecd/deselected through
Mute/UnMute Button on the screen

11.2 Screen View Selection 11.3 Entry and Exit Conditions
Two views are available – 11.3.1 Entry Conditions

• Screen with buttons
Whenever you apply the reverse gear, the infotainment will enter
into ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video.
You can view reverse video, by selecting Reverse View Camera
Option present on Infotainment Screen, irrespective of the gear
position.
Below is the path: Home → Car-Info → Rev Camera
• Screen without buttons
You cannot enter RVC Mode, through the infotainment screen

button, if the vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed
exceeds 20 kmph.

11.3.2 Exit Conditions • In case of any RVC-related issues, the Infotainment shall display
‘Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the
• If the user is not in Parallel or Angular Parking mode and Service Centre. Avoid using the Rear-View Camera under these
Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’ due to reverse gear, then circumstances
RVC mode exits, when the driver disengages reverse gear
• If the driver is not in Parallel or Angular Parking mode and
Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to Reverse Camera
selection present on the Infotainment, then RVC mode can be
exited, by selecting the Cancel button appearing on the screen
• Irrespective of RVC entry conditions, when driver is in Parallel or
Angular Parking Mode, driver can exit the RVC Mode using
Cancel button that appears, whenever driver is in forward gear
• RVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear and
vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph • If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is
changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised
11.4 Camera Maintenance Service Center, for recalibrating the Camera.
Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on 11.5 System Limitations
lens may lead to poor image quality.
Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens. • Reverse view camera may not operate normally, when you drive
in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating
temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C)
• Under certain circumstances given below, the rear view camera
Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view
system will work with limitation or will not function fully:
camera with a power washer.
- In heavy rain, snow or fog.

- At night or in very dark places. area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring
the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car
- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.
• The reverse view camera is only a supplementary function
- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective &
lighting. inaccurately
• If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot • Avoid using of rear view camera, if you are having eye colour
areas blindness or impaired colour vision
• If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed • Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far
• If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera
away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to
position and the settings got changed. Please contact the
your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the
nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the
risk of collision with your car
• Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time
due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and • It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area
protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to
to park his car safely
recognise. Please avoid reverse view camera in the above • Rear view video is shown, whenever reverse gear is applied,
situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects but it cannot be used as a rear view monitoring system,
and your vehicle which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and
• The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of interior view mirrors
ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera
Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to

enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way
• Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted manner, as replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this
like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no persons or system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no
animals and any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect,
incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

STEERING AND BRAKES
12 STEERING AND BRAKES

12.1 Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric power steering system

(EPS). There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. EPS uses energy
from the battery to decrease the driver's effort in steering the If the warning light remains illuminated after the engine has
vehicle. The EPS system will give you good vehicle response and been started, there will be no assistance from power steering.
increased ease of manoeuvrability in tight spaces. If for some The vehicle may be driven using the mechanical steering
reason the power assist is interrupted, it will provide mechanical system although it is not recommended as the effort to turn
steering capability to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions, you the steering wheel will be significantly high. In this case, contact
will observe a substantial increase in steering effort. an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
When driving in rough/off roads, hold the steering wheel rim, Keep both hands on the steering wheel, with the thumbs
do not hold the wheel spokes. A sudden bump can jerk/turn resting on the outer wheel rim.
the wheel and injure your hand. This may also lead to loss of
vehicle control. To help prevent damage to the power steering motor:
• Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the
extreme left for more than a few secs. when the engine is
The EPS warning light should only be illuminated with the running
ignition ON before starting the engine.
If the Electric power steering system breaks down (or if the

engine is turned OFF), you can still steer the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort.

STEERING AND BRAKES
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: The steering wheel can be adjusted for rake as required using the
lever in the steering shroud under the steering wheel.
• Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s)
• Uneven vehicle loading To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the Tilt lever down to unlock.
• High crown in the centre of the road
• High crosswinds
• Wheels out of alignment
• SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) calibration
• Wheels out of balance
• Loose or worn suspension components
12.1.1 Tilt Steering

2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.
3. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the
steering.
Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control

and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while
driving.

STEERING AND BRAKES
12.2 Steering Mode Control Switch driving safety system, when cornering or braking on the road
with different friction. You may feel the difference in steering
when these functions are in operation.
12.2.1 Steering Mode Control
The smart steer system allows adjusting the steering power

according to driver’s preference or road conditions.
3 levels (COMFORT, NORMAL, SPORT) of steering modes are
available to select using the Steering Mode Control switch.
COMFORT Mode
When pressing the Steering Mode Control switch, current steering
mode comes on the display.
You can change the steering mode in sequence (COMFORT =>
NORMAL => SPORT) as shown on the right, by pressing the
Steering Mode Control switch once more within 4 seconds. If the
Steering Mode Control switch is not pressed within 4 seconds, the
system will return to the previous mode.
The selected steering mode is still maintained after the ignition
switch turned OFF and back ON.
COMFORT mode can be selected if you want smoother and more

EPS (Electronic Power Steering) system is mounted in the comfortable driving than NORMAL mode.
steering handle. This system includes functions to compensate
the steering power, interlocking with ESP, the supplementary

STEERING AND BRAKES
NORMAL Mode 12.3 Steering Controls - Audio (if equipped)
The steering wheel also houses switches to control the main audio
functions.
NORMAL mode is used for general driving with normal steering
power.
12.3.1 Steering Audio Operations
SPORT Mode
A BLUETOOTH HANDSFREE D MUTE

B SEEK UP ˄/ DOWN˅ E VOLUME +
SPORT mode is suitable for sporty driving or while driving on a high
C MODE F VOLUME -
way.

STEERING AND BRAKES
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREE 12.4 Brakes

Phone switch using Bluetooth handsfree for mobile phone use. Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front and rear
SEEK UP ˄/ DOWN˅ wheels.
• In file play mode Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced stopping
Press the seek switch UP/DOWN: Moves to PREVIOUS/NEXT distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After
file of MP3 and video playing a car wash or driving the vehicle through water, pump the brake
pedal mildly while driving to remove the film of water from the brake
• In radio mode pads.
Press the seek switch UP/DOWN briefly: Manual search, moves
to selected channel Brake pads feature wear indicator. When the front brake pad is
Press and hold the seek switch UP/DOWN: Auto search worn out, there will be an indication in the cluster; the brake
MODE
warning lamp will be ON. Replace the brake pads immediately.
Press and hold the mode switch to change the audio mode (AM,
FM1, FM2 and etc.).
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance
MUTE increases considerably when braking.
Dry the brakes by driving at very slow speed and applying the
Press and hold the MUTE button for more than 2 seconds to
brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.
mute/unmute audio while in TUNER and AUX mode and pause the
song while in CD, USB mode.
VOLUME CONTROL (‘+’ and ‘-’ )
Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost,
Press ‘+’ and ‘-’ button to increase or decrease the volume the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much
harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance
will be longer than usual.

STEERING AND BRAKES
12.4.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in
gear. When parking on a hill; first apply the parking brake; after that
If you have to park facing uphill, select first gear and turn the front shift the gear lever to 1st gear. This will avoid the load on the
wheels away from the kerb. If you have to park facing downhill, transmission, locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the
select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb. shift lever out of gear.
Always ensure that the vehicle is in gear and parking brakes is
engaged before leaving the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off.
12.4.2 Parking Brake Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive
heating of the rear brakes. It will also result in reduced fuel
efficiency; lowered brake pad life and rear brake squeal.
• The parking brake should be adjusted as per recommended
maintenance schedule
• Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and
be certain to leave the transmission in gear. Failure to do so
may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a
bystander resulting in personal injury
To apply the parking brake, hold and pull the park brake lever up as firmly • Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
as possible. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON, the number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates. To release the the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key
parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release in the ignition. A child could move the vehicle leading to
button on the bottom of the lever and lower the parking brake lever accidents
completely.
• The parking brake should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle
The brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status. It
does not indicate the degree of brake application. Be sure the

STEERING AND BRAKES
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause 12.7 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident.
12.5 Hazard Activation Upon Crash
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate

event of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such a
scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 min or it can be turned
off by operating Hazard switch (Off to On) or Ignition reset (Ignition
Off and On)
The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help

Once activated hazard remains on for 30 minutes by default prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a
sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road
Deactivation
surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors
• 30 minutes since activation is elapsed and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the
wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during
• Hazard switch On to Off transition is made braking.
• IGN turned Off and again turned On
The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 kmph. ABS is
activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over
12.6 Vehicle Breakdown Warning and prevents wheel lock.
In case of a brake down, hazards would be turned on automatically During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake
to indicate oncoming traffic. This feature will come into action upon pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear motor noise from
opening the bonnet when vehicle speed is less than 5 kmph. the engine compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake
pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping the brake
pedal.

STEERING AND BRAKES
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed
manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. There are limits
bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation
system. even with ABS active.
The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning
the ignition and should go out after a few secs. If the occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the Anti-lock Brake
ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it comes ON System will not assist with vehicle control.
while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both
cases, the normal braking system remains efficient, exactly as on a 12.8 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as (if equipped)
possible by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always EBD, as a subsystem of the ABS system, controls the effective
drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the adhesion utilisation of the rear wheels. EBD aids in distributing the
vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the brake forces more evenly leading to better vehicle stability during
following cases: braking.
• Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads Typically, the front end carries more weight and EBD distributes
less braking pressure to the rear brakes avoiding a lock up/skid.
• Driving with tyre chains installed
For example, under light loads EBD applies less effort to the rear
• Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road brakes and for heavy loads it allows full braking effort to the rear
• Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or differences wheels.
in surface height
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as
ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as
possible by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the Anti-
lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control, it is still

HEATING, VENTILAT ION AND AIR- CO NDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC)
13 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR- or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite. They can also cause
CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC) suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed
with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form
HVAC system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to flammable mixture. Never try to service HVAC system yourself
automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air flow which would involve refrigerant handling.
rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger
compartment. By appropriately adjusting the control knobs/
switches provided on the HVAC control panel, located on centre - If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with
console, occupant’s comfort can be ensured. HVAC system also all the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to lack
helps in defrosting and defogging / de-misting the windshield and of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater,
windows. ventilate frequently.
Air flow direction can be further controlled by adjusting louvres of Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-
air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of HVAC blower. circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger
Engine coolant is utilised to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin compartment.
air, an air-condititioning circuit based on the vapour compression
refrigeration cycle is used. The air-condititioning system uses a
refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil. Although being non- To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system
ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions.
allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of
environment by contributing to global warming/climate change. snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front of air
vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.
Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is

under high pressure. The refrigerant is colourless and has
ethereal or faint sweetish odour. Exposure of refrigerant to skin

HEATING, VENTILA TIO N AND AIR -CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVA C)
13.1 HVAC Overview

HEA TING, VENTILAT ION A ND AIR- CO NDITIONING SYSTEM (HV AC)
13.1.1 Front Centre Vent

13.1.2 Front Side Vent
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving the knob
horizontally or vertically.
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving the airflow
direction control lever on the air outlet.
The outlet vents can be opened or closed using the vent dial.

13.2 Dual Zone Automatic Heater and A/C (if equipped)

13.2.1 Auto Operation Mode (Auto Indicator ON) Use only when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO (1) switch.
2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the display.
3. Set the desired cabin temperature with the temperature
control switch (2).
4. The temperature of the passenger compartment is
automatically maintained according to the set temperature.
5. If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in
their respective zones, the same can be done by pressing
the dual switch and subsequently, setting different
1 AUTO Switch
temperatures using temperature control switches.
2 Temperature control Switch When you use the blower speed control knob, mode switch (air
source selection switch), air conditioner switch or defroster switch
3 Auto Indicator ON during the auto operation mode, A U T O indicator on the display goes
out and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.

13.2.2 Manual Operation Mode (Auto Indicator OFF) 4. Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/mode
switch (4).
5. Select the air source mode by pressing air source selection
switch (5).
6. To turn on the air conditioner, press the A/C ON switch (6).
In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not come on
and you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling
the switches such as temperature, fan speed, mode (air
distribution), A/C, air source selection, MEMORY and DUAL temp.
selection control switches.
ON/OFF switch Air Source Selection

1 5
Switch
Temperature control To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
2 6 A/C ON Switch
switch
Fan speed control dial (2)
3 Fan Speed Control Dial 7 AUTO Indicator OFF
Air Distribution/Mode
4
Switch
Use only when the engine is running.

1. Press ON/OFF switch (1)
2. Set the desired temperature by pressing the temperature
control switch (2).
3. Adjust the fan speed by rotating the fan speed control dial
(3).

You can adjust the airflow by rotating the fan speed dial (2) with Defroster switch (4)
engine ON. If you adjust the airflow using fan speed dial (2) in AUTO
mode, the AUTO indicator (B) on display (1) goes off and the
operation mode is changed to the manual mode.
The air conditioner does not operate with rotating the fan
speed dial, if the A/C switch is not pressed. However, the air
flows due to the fan operation.
AUTO switch (3)
Use this switch for quick defrosting with the engine ON.
When you press this switch, its indicator lamp lights up, and the
airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses
while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
The temperature of the air is automatically changed to Hot when
the defrost switch is pressed. However, the user can reduce the
temperature by pressing the temperature down button as per wish.
At this time A/C, Defroster and Fresh air indicators come on in the
If you press the AUTO switch (3) with engine ON, AUTO indicator (B) display. If you press the switch again, defrosting stops with the
appears on display (1) and the set temperature is maintained while indicator lamp turned off and the mode returns to the previous
the airflow and air distribution are automatically controlled. operation. While the defroster switch (4) is operating, its indicator
lamp (L) lights up and the lamp (L) turns off when the defroster
The indicator lamp (L) lights up while AUTO switch (3) is operating, switch is not working.
and the lamp (L) turns off when the AUTO switch is not working.
DUAL mode will not function in Defrost mode.

HEATING, VENTILATIO N AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC)
MEMORY switch (5)

As a convenience function, pressing this switch, automatically change the current climate conditions to previously saved temperature, fan speed, air
source selection and mode while the engine is ON.
With MEMORY function, you can save maximum 3 modes which appear on display (w/ saved memory indicator) in sequence, each time MEMORY switch
is briefly pressed.
Examples of items that can be memorised are:
Memory item
MEMORY Driver side Passenger side Air Source
A/C Air Distribution Fan Speed Dual
Temp. Temp. Selection
1 22 deg C 22 deg C OFF Bi-level Fresh Air Level 2 OFF
2 25 deg C 23 deg C OFF Front View Recirculation Level 4 ON
3 30 deg C 28 deg C OFF Footwell Fresh Air Level 8 ON
MEMORY function will stop if you press any control switch other than MEMORY switch (5) during its operation.
How to use MEMORY function 6. Similarly set other 2 memory also.

1. Select the desired memory (1M, 2M or 3M), which needs to 7. User can select the desired Memory, all setting changes as
be set. stored in that memory.
2. Adjust the temp, Dual mode, mode, Auto etc what is desired.
3. Press and hold the MEMORY switch for 3-4 seconds. If you adjust the temperature, fan speed, Air source selection
and mode from saved memory location (1M, 2M, 3M), the
4. 1M/2M OR 3M selected in display blinks for 5 times, memory is replaced with new information, when you press and
stating the setting are getting saved. hold the memory switch for 3 - 4 seconds
5. Once settings are saved, the blinking STOPS.

ON/OFF switch (6) Co–Driver temperature control switch (7)
You can turn on or turn off the Dual automatic Temperature To adjust the temperature as desired, press the temperature
controller (DATC) by using this switch with IGN ON. control switch (7) while the engine is ON. The temperature
decreases with pressing blue ˅ (arrow) and increases with red ˄
The display (1) comes on or goes off by pressing ON/OFF switch (arrow).
(6).
The set temperature ( A , I ) is shown on the display after pressing
the switch (7).
Air source selection switch (8)
If you press this switch (8) with IGN ON, the indication lamp (L)
lights up and the air recirculation indicator on display (1) comes on.
If you press this switch (8) again, the indication lamp (L) turns off
and the air source selection is changed to Fresh air intake mode.

temperature control switch (7) is pressed, passenger side

temperature (A) on the display is adjusted as desired
Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended
periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause • While the DUAL mode switch (9) is operating, its indicator lamp
headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen (L) lights up and the lamp turns off when the DUAL mode switch
is not working
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide
poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing
through a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode.
When the DUAL mode switch (9) is turned off with its indicator
(K), the passenger temperature (A) returns to the driver side
set temperature (I).
Mode switch (10)
Each time you press this switch (10) with IGN ON, the air
Automatic selection of the fresh or air circulation mode distribution mode is changed and displayed as shown in the figure
below.
When the defroster switch is pressed, outside air automatically
comes in. When the switch is pressed again, the previous mode is When you press this switch in AUTO mode (AUTO indicator ON), the
restored. system is changed to the manual control mode (AUTO indicator
OFF).
DUAL switch (9)
This function allows controlling the passenger side temperature

separately with engine ON.
• If you press the DUAL switch (9), the indicator lamp (L) lights up
and DUAL mode indicator on the display comes on
• When the temperature control switch (11) is pressed, the driver
side temperature (I) on the display is adjusted as desired and

Face-Level (normally, when cooling)
Face/Foot-Level
Foot-Level (normally, when heating)

N o t e : When choosing this mode, some air flows out from
windshield and side glass vents to prevent from fogging on
the windshield.
Air conditioner switch (13)
Foot/Defrost-Level
Driver temperature control switch (11)
You can adjust the driver side temperature with this switch (11) if
the DUAL switch (9) is turned ON while the engine is running.
The temperature decreases with pressing blue ˅ (arrow) and
increases with red ˄(arrow).
Refer to dual switch (9) Air conditioner is turned ON and OFF with this switch (13). While air
conditioner switch (13) is operating, its indicator lamp (L) lights up,
and the lamp turns off when the switch is not working.

13.3 Manual Temperature Control (MTC)

Heater/Air conditioner operation Switch indicator lamp (1)
This lamp indicates temperature change by the temperature

control switch (2) operation.
As you press ˅ button on the temperature control switch (2), the
red LED (B) turns off one by one, and the blue LED (A) lights on in
the same way
As you press ˄ button on the temperature control switch (2), the
blue LED (A) turns off one by one, and the red LED (B) lights on in
the same way.
Temperature control switch (2)
Operate while the engine is running.
By pressing this switch, you can adjust the temperature as desired
• Adjust the airflow by rotating the fan speed control dial (4).
• Set the desired temperature by pressing the temperature Each time you press the ˄ button on temperature control switch,
control switch (2) the temperature increases and the temperature decreases as ˅
button is pressed.
• Adjust the air distribution with using the mode switch (8,
9,12,13) The blue (cold)/red (hot) LED in the switch indicator lamp (1) will
come on or goes off depending on the temperature control switch
• Select the air intake mode by pressing air circulation switch (7) (2) operation.
or fresh air intake switch (11)
• Press the air conditioner switch (5) to use A/C
While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up, and the While the red LEDs of the temperature indicator lamp (B) are
lamp turns off when the switch is not working. lighted on, they will turn off one by one each time you press ˅
button on the temperature control switch (2). Likewise, the blue
LEDs will go off one by one as you press the ˄ button on the

temperature control switch (2) while they came on the Air conditioner switch (5)
temperature indicator lamp (A).
Rotate the fan speed control dial (4) clockwise (B ) from the OFF
Dial position indicator (3) position while the engine is ON.
This indicator shows current position of the fan speed control dial 1. Press the air conditioner switch (5).
(4).
2. Press the temperature control switch (2) to adjust for the
Fan speed control dial (4) cool air to come out.
You can adjust the airflow by rotating the fan speed control dial (4) 3. Set the air distribution as desired by pressing the mode
with IGN ON. switch (8 , 9 , 12, 13).
The fan speed decreases if you rotating the dial (4) While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up, and the
counterclockwise (A) and it increases when you rotate the dial lamp turns off when the switch is not working.
clockwise (B). This will stop at OFF position of the dial (4).
Do not use recirculation mode for extended periods of time.

Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window
due to lack of oxygen.
The air conditioner does not operate with rotating the fan
speed dial (4), if the A/C switch (5) is not pressed. However,
the air flows 7 due to the fan operation.

Defroster switch (6) Air recirculation mode switch (7)
Use this switch for quick defrosting with the engine ON. When you press this switch (7), air recirculation mode is applied
and indicator lamp (7C) lights on.
When you press this switch (6), its indicator lamp (C) lights up, and
the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses Use this mode when maximum heating/air conditioning is needed.
while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
To cancel the air recirculation mode, press the fresh air intake
To cancel the defroster function, press any switch among the mode mode switch (11).
switch (8, 9,12,13) and MAX A/C switch (10).
Do not use recirculation mode for extended periods of time.

When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window
windshield and windows. The fog will block your view through all due to lack of oxygen.
windows and can create a dangerous situation. If this happens, If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide
press the mode switch (12 ) to change the airflow direction poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing
toward the windshield with defrost foot through a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode.
MAX A/C switch (10)
When you press MAX A/C (Maximum cooling) switch (10) while
the heater or A/C is running,
• The air conditioner operates
• The air recirculation mode is applied
• The air flows toward the face
• The temperature is automatically set to the lowest with all blue
LEDs (4EA) of the temperature indicator lamp (A) lighted up

You can adjust the airflow distribution with using these switches.
While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up, and the
lamp turns off when the switch is not working.
The air flows toward the windshield and door glasses. If

you press the defroster switch, the fresh air intake
1 mode is automatically applied and the air conditioner
operates.
2 Face-Level (when cooling)

Fresh air intake mode switch (11)
When you press this switch (11), fresh air intake mode is applied
3 Face/Foot-Level
and indicator lamp (11C) lights on.
To cancel the fresh air intake mode, press the recirculation mode Face-Level. The air recirculation mode is applied and
switch (7). MAX the air conditioner operates.
4 A/C The lowest temperature is automatically selected with
Airflow mode switch (6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13) all blue LEDs lighted on (Maximum cooling position).
Foot/Defrost-Level
5
The fresh air intake mode is automatically applied.
Foot-Level (normally, when heating)
6 N o t e : While in Foot mode, some air flows to the
windshield and door glasses to prevent the windshield
from fogging

13.4 Defogging/Defrosting
13.4.1 Dual Zone Automatic Heater and A/C To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended
to set the air source selection switch (4) to the fresh air intake
• Press the defroster switch (1). (The indicator lamp (C) ON) mode.
• When the defrost button is pressed then,
1. If the previous set blower speed is 0, then it will be set to
1.
2. If the previous set blower speed is between 1 and 3, then
it will be set to 3.
3. If the previous set blower speed is greater than 3, then it
will remain same.
The display shows A/C, Defrost and Fresh air indicators
• The temperature of the air is automatically changed to Hot when
the defrost switch is pressed. However, the user can reduce the
If you press the defroster switch (1), the fresh air intake mode
temperature by pressing the temperature down button as per
is applied with A/C ON.
wish.
• To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the fan speed control
dial (2) at a high speed position
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the
• DUAL mode will not function in Defrost mode windshield and windows. The fog will block your view through all
windows and can create a dangerous situation. If this happens,
set the air source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode
and change the airflow direction toward the windshield.

• An extended air conditioner operation in the foot-level, foot/defrost-

level or defrost modes may cause the outside of the windshield to
fog due to the temperature difference between the inside and the
outside of the vehicle. In this case, quickly remove the moisture
using the windshield wipers and change the airflow to face-level
mode to reduce fogging on the outside of the windshield
• Make sure to remove any foreign matters such as snow and leaves
on the air inlets to avoid window fogging, especially in winter and
summer
If you press the defroster switch (1), the fresh air intake mode is applied
13.4.2 Manual Heater/Air Conditioner with A/C ON.
• Press the defroster switch (1). (The indicator lamp (C) ON)
• Rotate the fan speed control dial (2) clockwise from the OFF When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield and
position windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and can create a
dangerous situation. If this happens, set the air source selection switch to
• Set the temperature as desired using the control switch (3) the fresh air intake mode and change the airflow direction toward the
windshield.
• To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the fan speed control
dial (2) at a high speed position
• An extended air conditioner operation in the foot-level, foot/defrost-

level or defrost modes may cause the outside of the windshield to
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended to set the air
fog due to the temperature difference between the inside and the
source selection switch (4) to the fresh air intake mode.
outside of the vehicle. In this case, quickly remove the moisture
using the windshield wipers and change the airflow to face-level
mode to reduce fogging on the outside of the windshield

• Make sure to remove any foreign matters such as snow and leaves 1. Detach the locknut (10 MM, 1EA) and screws (2EA) from
on the air inlets to avoid window fogging, especially in winter and lower part of the glove box.
summer
2. Open the glove box by pressing the open switch.
3. Remove the glove box by loosening 4 screws and 3 of IP
13.5 Replacing Air Conditioner Filter setscrews from upper part of the glove box
Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When
Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long

unused period.
Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
• Do not apply excessive force to the holders when removing the

glove box. It may cause a deformation of holders and results in a
loose installation
4. Disconnect the switch wirings (1) and lamp wirings (2) while
• Replace air conditioner filter while paying attention to the installing pulling out the glove box
direction
• Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10000 km of driving.

However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such as
on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or heater
use, the replacement interval can be shortened
• When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or
heating capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors

5. After detaching the damper cable by pulling it up, remove the

glove box completely. (When attaching, make sure that the
damper cable passes through the inside of the fixing bracket.)
When replacing the filter, the arrow printed on the side of the filter
should face to the blower motor.
6. Pull out the A/C filter after removing the fixing cover by pulling
it off using your hand
When replacing the filter, the arrow printed on the side of the
filter should face to the blower motor
7. Install in reverse order of removal.

STARTING AND DRIVING THE VEHICLE
14 STARTING AND DRIVING THE VEHICLE
14.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed
area. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door
14.1.1 General open or start the engine in an open area.
• Before starting the vehicle, inspect the inside and outside of the 14.1.2 Mirror Adjustment
vehicle; look for any damages, leaks, loose parts, foreign
objects/debris. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer if Ensure that the rearview mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted
required for an unobstructed view of the road behind.
• Before starting your journey, check the working of all safety
devices/components, especially brakes, steering, lamps, signals 14.1.3 Exterior Lamps
and tyres. In case you suspect any system/devices are not
working properly, contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer Have someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior
• Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat belt lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat. Also,
as described in this manual. Never perform any seat / steering check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.
adjustments when the vehicle is in motion
• Start the vehicle only when seated and belted in the driver's seat 14.1.4 Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both
from inside and outside.
The Engine Management System controls the engine's idle
speed. When the engine starts, idle RPM runs higher than
normal in order to warm the engine. The engine idle speed 14.1.5 Fluid Leaks
RPM reduces once the engine warms up.
Check the area under the vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel,
power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid

leaks. If leaks are observed, contact an Authorised Mahindra 6. Once the engine starts, release the key; it will return to the IGN
Dealer. position.
14.2 Starting the Engine

Do not continue cranking after the engine has started. This
Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats will lead to damage of the starter and other engine
and have buckled their safety belts. For more information on seat, components.
headrest positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer to 7. If the engine fails to start, attempt to restart after about 10
the “Seat Belts” section in this manual. seconds
8. If the engine fails to start even after repeated attempts as per
the procedure given above, contact the nearest Authorised
Before cranking the engine Mahindra Dealer.
• Make sure the gear shift lever is in neutral
• Make sure the parking brake is engaged. Turn the key to IGN
position but do not turn the key to start To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 secs before
attempting to restart the engine.
• Few warning lamps briefly illuminate. See “Warning Lamps in
the Instrument Cluster” section for more information
1. Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position.
If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a
2. Apply parking brake. booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start.
3. Turn the ignition ON. Jump-starting a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly.
Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure” section in this manual.
4. Do not press the accelerator.
5. Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the If the engine still fails to start, contact an Authorised Mahindra
engine. Dealer for assistance.

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the 14.3 Stopping the Engine
engine warms up.
Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to
Observe the following when the engine is running: normal idle speed and run for few secs. This assures proper cooling
• All warning lamps are OFF and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary
after any hard driving.
• Low oil pressure lamp is OFF
After idling for a few secs., release the parking brake, depress the
clutch, shift the gear shift lever to 1st gear, release the service To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the
brake pedal, drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the engine and leaving the vehicle, always:
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
• Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal
14.2.1 Engine Idling - In Cold Weather • Turn front wheels towards the road curb
• Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged and remove the key
idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling may be
harmful to your engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can • Firmly engage the parking brake
drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete • Move the gear shift lever to 1st gear position (reverse gear if
combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and parking on an incline)
injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine. • Slowly release the service brake pedal
• Lock your vehicle when leaving

14.4 Exhaust Gases 14.5 Driving Your Vehicle
Protection against exhaust gas entry into the vehicles interior is 14.5.1 General Driving Precautions
considered in the design of the exhaust system.
• Vehicle exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide, Carbon Dioxide,
Nitrogen Oxides, Hydrocarbons and Particulate Matter. These
are potential environmental and health hazards Always observe the following precautions to minimise the risk of
accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your
• Avoid inhaling the exhaust gases. Carbon Monoxide is a vehicle.
colourless and odourless gas and can cause unconsciousness
or even death • Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully
• If the exhaust system is damaged for any reason or you notice a • Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes
change in the exhaust noise, have the vehicle checked by an and steering system
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately • If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual
• Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any
area where ventilation is poor for the exhaust gases warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the
vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause
• Since the engine compartment and exhaust system components and take any necessary remedial action. Contact your
are hot and can ignite a fire, do not park or leave the vehicle with Authorised Mahindra Dealer if necessary
the engine idling over dry grass, leaves, paper, rags or any
combustible material • Never overload or improperly load your vehicle
• Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices
• Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres
Never keep the engine running when the vehicle is parked in an
area which is not properly ventilated. This could lead to serious • Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving
respiratory problems and/or death. conditions. You must follow the speed limits

• While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly • Be extremely careful when driving on pavements made slippery
children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice
be present behind the vehicle
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
• Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicles avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back
centre of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn
the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road
• Loaded vehicles, with a higher centre of gravity, may handle surface
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken • It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may
lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering
• Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and
wheel too sharply or abruptly
higher centre of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side
winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow • In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp
you to have much better control turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and
as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will
• When driving off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at
result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of
excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc.
the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilised
This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious
if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering,
injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's
acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of
suspension and chassis
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury.
• Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe
terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering direction of travel
wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes
14.5.2 Off-Road Driving Precautions
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from
concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in • When driving off-road or on rugged terrains, never over speed or
the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle
steering, braking and accelerating inputs rollover causing serious injury

• Maintain steering wheel control at all times. Sudden changes in and control speed, using only the brakes. At higher speed
terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion waves can be generated by the front of the vehicle. These
water waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine
• Do not drive horizontally or diagonally across steep slopes, your
damage or cause a vehicle to get stalled.
vehicle can tip over sideways. Driving straight up or straight
down is preferred You must slow down while driving through shallow water.
Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield,
• Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects impairing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a
such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss
map-out your route before driving in the area of control in the vehicle.
• Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off- • The ground under the water might not be firm which could result
road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle
or water through it
• Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It
14.5.3 Driving Through Water helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, • When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to
there are a number of precautions that must be considered before immerse in water
entering the water. • Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing
rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials,
transmission and transfer case, reducing the oil's lubricating
Never drive through still water that is higher than the bottom of qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should
the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will allow water to be replaced as required
enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the • Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift
components, affecting driveability, safety, emissions and quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration,
reliability. and ultimately damaging the transmission
When driving through water, drive very slowly and at constant
speed, less than 8 kmph. Drive with accelerator pedal in OFF

• Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in brake drums and 14.5.5 After Driving Off-Road or through Water
around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also
damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection after
driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough
brake pedal terrain, sand, mud, or water.
• When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be • After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage.
limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any damages
of off-road driving that has taken you through water
• Check for accumulations of plants or bushes or polyethylene /
plastic. These could be a fire hazard. They might also hide
14.5.4 Flowing Water damage to fuel lines, brake tubes/hoses, etc.
• Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid
crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is • Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned
reduced.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to chassis, drivetrain components, steering, suspension and
sink into deeper water. brakes. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the ‘Repair Manual’
Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to compensate for drifting. • We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the
Authorised Mahindra Dealer for any water entry into the
transmission/axle or the engine
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause

excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have
full braking power when needed leading to accidents. If you have

been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the brakes • While idling, put the gear shift lever in the neutral position
checked and cleaned as necessary.
• Resting your foot on the clutch pedal while driving will reduce fuel
• If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for economy
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
• Combine errands and minimise stop-and-go driving
imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible
• Keep tyres properly inflated. It is recommended to check your
• After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and
tyre pressure in the morning when the tyre is cold
lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to
ensure the fluids have not been contaminated • Use recommended Lubricants. Refer to the Maintenance
Section for specifications and capacities
14.6 Tips for Better Fuel Economy • Operating with lower quantity or specification may reduce fuel
efficiency
Give due consideration to the points listed below for better
performance of vehicle and enhancement of fuel economy: • Replace the fuel filter, air filter and AC filter at the recommended
intervals
• Smooth, moderate operation will yield savings in fuel
• Shift gears at the recommended speeds and RPM bands only.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel Refer to the Gear Shifting Speed table for further details
economy
• Control the maximum speed between 80 and 100 kmph in 6th
• Ensure that the parking brake is fully released gear to achieve the best fuel efficiency
• Idling for long periods of time will waste fuel • Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and perform
the owner maintenance checks recommended
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to
stop • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer will reduce fuel
economy
• Sudden or hard accelerations reduce fuel economy
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy
• Warming up a vehicle in neutral on cold mornings is not required
and may reduce fuel economy

• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle may reduce fuel 14.7 Ignition Switch (if equipped)
economy
• Driving on flat terrains offer improved fuel economy as
compared to driving on hilly terrains
• Close windows during high speed driving for better fuel economy
• It is recommended to refuel in the morning (cold ambient
temperature condition)
14.6.1 How to Calculate Fuel Efficiency (Mileage)

1. Ensure recommended tyre pressure is maintained.
An illuminator ring is provided on the face of the ignition switch to
2. Refuel your vehicle till the fuel gun at the fuel station with auto- help in locating the ignition switch at night. The ring will illuminate
cut-off. the moment the driver door is opened and will remain glowing till
3. Reset trip meter to zero. the driver door is closed.
4. Drive at a moderate speed for a minimum distance of 150 km. The different positions of the ignition switch are:
5. Refuel at the same fuel station till the auto-cut-off. L O C K - This is the ignition and steering lock position. The vehicle
6. Assuming ‘a’ litres of fuel was filled and ‘b’ was the trip meter circuits and engine is completely switched OFF. The steering wheel
reading. Fuel Efficiency = b/a kmpl. is also locked and the key can be removed from the ignition only in
this position.
A C C - The steering is unlocked and can be rotated. In this position,
all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode when you want to
listen to music, etc., with the engine temporarily switched OFF.
O N - All electrical circuits are enabled. Some of the warning or
information lamps illuminate in this position. While some of the

lamps will go out after a few secs., some will continue to remain ON
till the engine is started. When the vehicle is being driven, ignition
switch remains in the ON position. Never return the key to the LOCK position or try to remove the
key, when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key allows the
steering wheel to lock. You will lose the control of the vehicle
and may cause serious accident. Remove the key only when the
Do not leave the ignition in ON when the engine is OFF. This vehicle is parked.
could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.
Key left warning buzzer
S T A R T - This position is to start the engine by cranking the starter
motor. This is a momentary position. When the key is turned to When opening the driver’s door after the ignition key is not
start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once the engine is removed from lock set, the buzzer will sound to alert you that the
running, release the key, and the key reverts back to ON position key is not removed. The buzzer will automatically turn off when
and the starter motor disengages from the engine. closing the door or key is removed. After this, the buzzer will not
sound even though the door is opened again.
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started. This will 14.8 Pedals
lead to damage of the starter and other engine components.
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from side
to side and try again.
The key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When the
key is removed, the steering column lock is activated and the
steering wheel cannot be turned.
A Accelerator Pedal B Brake Pedal C Clutch Pedal

14.9 Transmission 14.9.2 Gear Indicator
The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This The current gear lever position is indicated in the centre of the
is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the speedometer dial.
initial few hundred kilometres of running.
14.9.1 Gear Lever
14.9.3 Neutral Position
This position stops the transmission of power from the engine to

Your vehicle is fitted with manual transmission having six forward drive axle. With the gear lever in neutral and brakes released, the
and one reverse gear. This shift pattern is imprinted on the gear vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be
lever knob. The transmission is fully synchronised in all forward started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake
gears, so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral
accomplished. The clutch pedal should be depressed fully while when the vehicle is standstill for longer durations with the engine
shifting, and then released slowly. idling.

14.9.5 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds

Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine While driving, shift the gears as per recommended speeds for
ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic braking, you getting optimal Fuel Efficiency.
will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the
vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident. Upshifting
Vehicle Road Speed

Shift Range Tolerance (kmph)
(kmph)
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral position.
Always engage manual parking brake before leaving the vehicle, 1-2 17
to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a 2-3 25
bystander or damage to vehicle. 3-4 38 +/- 2
4-5 53
14.9.4 Gears 1-6 5-6 65
Downshifting
Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic conditions or
as per requirement. The current gear selection is indicated in the
cluster. Vehicle Road Speed
Shift Range Tolerance (kmph)
(kmph)
2-1 14
Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear lever 3-2 22
from the current position to any desired position. Perform up- 4-3 35 +/- 2
shifts or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears. 5-4 48
6-5 60

The reverse lock ring located immediately below the gear shift knob
must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the reverse
Shift gears at suitable road speeds to safeguard the (R) position.
transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s (>3000
RPM).
To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse gear
only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be sufficient to engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you wait
prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the manual parking approximately for three secs. in neutral gear before shifting into
brake in addition to shifting the gear lever into gear. It is also or out of reverse gear.
recommended to turn the front wheels towards the road curb.
14.9.6 Reverse For brief stops, e. g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in
neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged
stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply
the parking brake. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
gradient, do not hold it with the clutch/accelerator; use the
brake to avoid unnecessary clutch wear/heat buildup.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access

to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear lever,
which could result in an accident or serious injury.
This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction.
Move the gear lever into this position only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the gear lever is in neutral position.

On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift in order to The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
reduced vehicle control. prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
14.10 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (if equipped) and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle dangerous manner that could jeopardise the user’s safety or
under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for over-steering the safety of others.
and under-steering behaviour of the vehicle by applying the brake of
the appropriate wheel automatically. Engine power may also be
reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or 14.10.1 ESP ON
under-steer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in active
ESP uses steering angle sensors and YAW rate sensor to mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path When the ESP is in operation, ESP indicator lamp
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the blinks in the instrument cluster.
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-
steer or under-steer.
O v e r - s t e e r - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for When the ESP is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in the
the steering wheel position. vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates
nothing unusual.
U n d e r - s t e e r - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for
the steering wheel position. When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator
response may be different because ESP system controls the
engine RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is
normal.

14.10.2 ESP OFF ESP, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.
In some driving conditions, to maximise traction, it may be beneficial If the ESP indicator blinks while driving, it indicates
to de-activate ESP. that ESP is working. If this indicator illuminates
continuously, it indicates a malfunction in the ESP
Such conditions are: system. Drive carefully to the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer
and get the ESP system checked.
• To start in deep snow or on a loose surface
• Driving in deep sand
14.10.3 Uphill and Downhill Driving
• Driving through deep mud etc.
To prevent the engine from labouring at a low RPM when driving
To de-activate ESP, press ESP OFF button on the uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift when
central bezel switch bank. Once ESP OFF mode is necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range.
selected, a warning indicator illuminates in the Similarly, while driving downhill, downshift to utilise the engine
instrument cluster. braking in an optimum manner.
Press ESP OFF button again to activate ESP function.
14.11 Engine Idling
Mahindra recommends that ESP be operational in all normal The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the
driving conditions. engine warms up.
When ESP is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Observe that all warning lamps are OFF when the engine is running.
Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent
Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) After idling for a few secs, follow the below steps to drive away:
will be in working mode. 1. Release the parking brake.
However, for safety reasons, if the ESP system detects that the 2. Depress the clutch.
vehicle is going into a unstable condition, ESP will be 3. Shift the gear lever to 1st gear.
automatically activated on depressing the brake pedal

4. Release the service brake pedal. 14.12 Cruise Control (if equipped)
5. Drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the accelerator
pedal simultaneously. Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need
to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for
cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving,
14.11.1 Engine Idling - In Cold Weather inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather
conditions.
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged
idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling may be It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set
harmful to your engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection of the
drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete engine in order to maintain the set speed.
combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and
injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
You must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulphur Diesel. For
smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold
weather conditions, use winter diesel for refuelling which is available
at filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer
for details.
The recommended engine coolant mixture will work fine till ambient
temperatures do not drop below -32ºC approx. For ensuring above
performance, it is a must that you use only recommended engine A Cruise ON/OFF C Cruise Set +/-
coolant.
B Voice Command D Resume
Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you
to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of
the cruise control can lead to an accident.

When Set +/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12 secs. (In
this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition
Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the
35 kmph for all gears except 1st and reverse gears. The cruise ignition, wait for 30 secs. and switch ON the ignition)
lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise
control is active. Cruise influencing error not indicated by Check Engine Lamp,
OBD lamp, etc.
Cruise control will function only under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is cruising above 35 kmph 14.12.1 Cruise Control Activation
• Engine RPM above 1200 or above 1500
Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater
• Clutch pedal released than 35 kmph), press and hold the SET + button until the cruise
lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
• Brake pedal released
• Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + button If cruise is deactivated (e. g. by depressing brake to handle an
intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the
• Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME
buttons in the same ignition cycle button.
Cruise control is deactivated under the following conditions: Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or
• CRUISE OFF button is pressed down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is
indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
• Brake or clutch pedal depressed
If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by 30 kmph by 14.12.2 Cruise Control De-activation
accelerator pedal intervention
• If vehicle speed is increased by 10 kmph for more than 30 secs. You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:
by pressing the accelerator pedal • Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel
• Press the brake pedal

• Gear selector moved into neutral ceases to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality,
ignition has to be toggled.
• HDC or ESP becomes active
14.12.3 SET + Button

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist
the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all times
SET + Button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase
remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the
the cruise set speed.
vehicle brake operation / steering control.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET +
Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by
about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in
speed, press and hold the SET + Button and release when the adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery etc.)
desired speed is reached.
14.12.5 Voice Command

14.12.4 SET - Button
Refer to the infotainment e-manual
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - Button.
Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2
kmph. 14.12.6 RESUME Button
When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising
and hold the SET- Button. When the desired speed is reached, speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained
release the button. with the following example:
1. Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle
speed at 50 kmph.
If switch is pressed for more than 12 secs., the switch is
2. Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the
assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality
cruise mode by pressing the brake pedal.

3. Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode. F o r D i e s e l V a r i a n t - Use only commercially available vehicular Ultra-
4. When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to low Sulphur Highway Diesel that meets the BIS standard (diesel fuel
cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system conforming to IS 1460:2017 BS-IV specification or equivalent).
activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising Information on diesel quality can normally be found in the fuel pump.
speed of 50 kmph. Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump
cannot be found.
5. To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed
should be above 35 kmph. F o r P e t r o l V a r i a n t - Use only commercially available Petrol fuel
conforming to Indian Standard (IS 2798: 2010 BS-IV specification
or equivalent). Information on Petrol quality can normally be found in
14.12.7 Override Function the fuel pump. Please contact filling station personnel in case labels
in the pump cannot be found.
This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to
overtake front vehicle.
The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. Do not fill the fuel tank or mix the fuel with gasoline, alcohol-
User has to complete this action within 30 secs. to maintain the based fuels, kerosene, etc. This will damage the engine, fuel and
cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 secs. limit, cruise mode will be exhaust system components.
deactivated.
If you have accidentally filled the fuel tank with incorrect or non-
approved fuel, do not start the vehicle. Contact an Authorised
14.13 Fuel Mahindra Dealer to have the fuel system drained completely.
14.13.1 Fuelling during Winter
During freezing weather, if fuel is not winterised or is insufficiently

winterised, waxing/gelling may start in fuel, leading to interruption
in fuel supply to engine. For smooth functioning and reliable
operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use

winterised ULSD which are available at the filling stations during 14.13.3 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing
winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for further details.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapours and any skin or clothing contact.

Direct skin contact with diesel or the inhalation of fuel vapour
may affect your health.
Diesel is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and

can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking Open the fuel filler door by pulling up the release lever located on
materials near diesel. Turn OFF the engine before refuelling. the lower left side of the driver seat.
Whenever you are around diesel, extinguish all smoking
materials.
14.13.2 Minimum Fuel Requirement
It is recommended maintaining a minimum of 10 litres of fuel in the

fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is empty is not
recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the
fuel level prior to starting your journey.
Open the fuel filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Hang the fuel filler cap on the holder mounted on the back of the lid.
Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise until you hear a “click”, and
dangerous and may lead to inadvertent fuel leak or spillage. close the lid by pushing it back.

WHEELS AND TYRES
15 WHEELS AND TYRES 15.2 Tyre Rating
15.1 Tyre Information Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputable
manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres,
please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to
the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You
may also contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer directly, or the tyre
manufacturer.
The tyre rating of XUV300 is:
• 205/65/R16 – W4/W6
• 215/55/R17 – W8/W8(O)
Tyre rating is explained as below:
A RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE
B “TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”
C TYRE SIZE
D MAX. LOAD LIMIT
E TREAD WEAR

WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre size (Example: 215/65 R16 98H) 15.2.1 Speed Rating

C a l l o u t ( A ) : 2 1 5 ( T h r e e - d i g i t n u m b e r ) : This number gives the width
in millimetres of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is MAX. SPEED MAX. SPEED
called as “Section Width”. SPEED CAPABILITY SPEED CAPABILITY
SYMBOL SYMBOL
C a l l o u t ( B ) : 6 5 ( T w o - d i g i t n u m b e r ) : This number, known as the KM/HR KM/HR
aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.
L 120 T 190
C a l l o u t ( C ) : R : This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands
for Radial. M 130 U 200
C a l l o u t ( D ) : 1 6 ( T w o - d i g i t n u m b e r ) : This number is the wheel or rim
N 140 H 210
diameter in inches.
C a l l o u t ( E ) : 9 5 ( T w o o r t h r e e - d i g i t n u m b e r ) : This number is the tyres P 150 V 240
load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can
Q 160 W 270
support.
C a l l o u t ( F ) : H : Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the R 170 Y 300
vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes
S 180 Z 240+
the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation
pressure.

WHEELS AND TYRES
15.3 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)

Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure,
affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance,
resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or
can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
15.4 Tyre Pressure
Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner B- satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are
pillar. This placard tells you important information about tyre size affected by improper Tyre pressure:
designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the
front & rear tyres. • Safety
• Economy
XUV300 VEH IC LE COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSU RE
bar/psi/kPa • Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
205/65/R16 – W4/W6 Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride.
TYRE Overinflating produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both
215/55/R17 – W8/W8(O)
underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and
R 16 2.2 / 32 / 220 (Front and Rear) can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness
R 17 2.2 / 34 /220 (Front and Rear) in the steering. Unequal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and
unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift
left or right.

WHEELS AND TYRES
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to 7° C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking
develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will Tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement.
Under inflation also increases Tyre rolling resistance and results in When it was new, the spare Tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated.
higher fuel consumption. However, a spare Tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to
avoid being stranded, check the spare Tyre air pressure frequently.
The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre 15.4.2 Inflating Your Tyres
Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side
inner B-pillar. Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your Tyres are properly
inflated. Remember that a Tyre can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
15.4.1 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure
At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each Tyre and
The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as check the Tyre pressure with a Tyre gauge (including spare Tyre).
inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a Inflate all Tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.
month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check Tyre pressure.
Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation.
Radial Tyres may look properly inflated even when they are
Under-inflation is the most common cause of Tyre failures and
underinflated. At the same time, each Tyre should be inspected for
may result in severe Tyre cracking, tread separation or
signs of Tyre wear or visible damage.
“blowout,” with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold Tyre risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and
inflation pressures. Cold Tyre inflation pressure is defined as the rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage
Tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least to the Tyre. It also may result in unnecessary Tyre stress,
three hours, or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period. irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.
Check Tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of
Always inflate your Tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is
outdoor temperatures, as Tyre pressures vary with temperature
less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the
changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
Tyre. The recommended Tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre

WHEELS AND TYRES
Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. 15.4.4 Tread Wear Indicators (TWI)
Failure to follow the Tyre pressure recommendations can cause
uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your Tread wear indicators are moulded into the bottom of the tread
vehicle handles. grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes
1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear in two or more
adjacent grooves, the Tyre should be replaced.
If you overfill the Tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in
the centre of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.
Avoid abrupt manoeuvring and braking. This can cause Tyre
deterioration and lead to loss of steering or braking control.
After inspecting or adjusting the Tyre pressure, always reinstal
the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and 15.4.5 Life of Tyre
dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the
stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre pressure, an The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors
accident and/or personal injury. including but not limited to:
• Driving style
15.4.3 Radial Ply Tyres
• Tyre pressure
• Distance driven
Combining radial ply Tyres with other types of Tyres on your

vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an
Tyres and the spare Tyre should be replaced after six years,
accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial Tyres in sets
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning
of four. Never combine them with other types of Tyres.
can result in sudden and unexpected Tyre failure, leading to an
Cuts and punctures in radial Tyres are repairable only in the accident and/or personal injury.
tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your Authorised
Mahindra Dealer for radial Tyre repairs.

WHEELS AND TYRES
Keep dismounted Tyres in a cool, dry place with as little In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended
exposure to light as possible. Protect Tyres from contact with using winter Tyres with the same specifications for better
oil, grease and fuels. stability, safety and performance.
15.5 Tyre Rotation Recommendations

Do not use a Tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that
specified for your vehicle on the Tyre placard. Combinations of Type 1 - Applicable for all 5 Steel
unapproved Tyres and wheels may change suspension
geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle
or the Tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/
or personal injury.
Replacing original Tyres with Tyres of a different size may result

in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different
loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking
15.4.6 Snow Chains functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and
develop irregular wear patterns.
Snow chains cannot be used on these Tyres.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and
wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow
the recommended Tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.

WHEELS AND TYRES
Type 2 - Applicable for 4 Alloy wheels and Spare wheel with Steel rim 15.5.1 Changing a Flat Tyre
It is recommended rotating the Tyres as per the “Maintenance Refer to “If you have a Flat Tyre” section in the general chapter for
Schedule”. details.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with 15.5.2 Wheel Tightness
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type Tyres.
When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations
where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire
brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel
could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged
the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel studs or nuts are
damaged, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Always tighten the nuts in a criss-cross sequence. Never use oil

or grease on your wheel studs or nuts.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and Never overtighten the nuts on the wheel stud. You could
wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow damage the stud or the nut.
the recommended Tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving. Torque tighten the wheel nuts to the specified value at the
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer .
any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and
they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor
Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.

WHEELS AND TYRES
15.6 Tiretronics (if equipped) Tyre locations will display as OK, if all tyre pressure and
temperature are in the recommended range except for spare tyre
TPMS is an electronic system designed to monitor the air pressure (User Shall verify spare tyre pressure, in certain conditions system
inside the pneumatic tyres. This system will alert the driver if the may not update pressure for Spare tire correctly)
tyre pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any
reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure The User can press show all button is HMI to see pressure and
loss through the tyre. temperature for all running tyres.
The TPMS will continue to alert the driver and will not turn off until
the tyre pressure is inflated to the recommended pressure.
15.6.1 Operation of TPMS

TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tyre pressure . Sensors mounted to the valve
stem of each wheel, transmit tyre pressure readings to the
receiver module. Receiver module i will communicate this
information to the instrument cluster and infotainment system.
The TPMS has been customized only for the manufacturer’s
genuine tyres and wheels. TPMS pressure limits and warning
messages have been established for the tyre size equipped on your
vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a different size,
type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to
incorrect readings. Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with TPMS. Failure to
comply may lead to sensor damage. The TPMS is not intended to
replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tyre failure or condition.

WHEELS AND TYRES
The TPMS should not be used as a tyre pressure gauge while • Sensor signal missing
adjusting vehicle tyre pressure.
• Sensor faulty
Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and If above condition occurs, contact the nearest Authorized
may lead to tyre failure. Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.
Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel efficiency, tyre tread life and may The Warning (Alert)is also displayed on the infotainment screen as
affect the vehicle's maneuverability & braking ability. below
The TPMS is not a substitute for tyre maintenance, it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate
pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS warning indicator.
15.6.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp
Examples of TPMS warning lamp illumination and corresponding

infotainment screen display;
• Low pressure warning sets whenever current tyre temperature
is less than low pressure threshold ( Low Pressure threshold will
change with respect to current tire Temperature
TPMS warning lamp will blink for 90 seconds and remain ON in the
instrument cluster , if any of the below mentioned condition occurs
in thetyres;

WHEELS AND TYRES
• High pressure (> 44psi /3.031 bar) • High temperature (>85DegC)
• Air leakage (> 3 psi/sec /0.25 bar/sec)

15.6.3 Tiretronics Learning
After a tyre rotation or TPMS sensor replacement, the receiver

must be learnt, else the TPMS warning lamp indicates a
malfunction.

WHEELS AND TYRES
TPMS learning: Trip button which is located in Below Infotainment 2. Start removing air from front left tyre, once the tyre gets
system as shown in above fig. learnt, vehicle alarm and hazard lamps flash once. The
infotainment screen display is as below.
15.6.4 Tiretronics Learning Procedure
1. Press the Trip button and turn ignition ON along with the
button pressed and release Trip button after 3 sec ( IGN
ON).. The infotainment screen displays as above and TPMS
warning lamp in the cluster starts blinking & vehicle siren
and Turn lamp turn On for two pulse.
3. Repeat the above step for front right tyre, rear right tyre
and rear left tyre (in the same order). Corresponding
infotainment screen displays are as below.

WHEELS AND TYRES
4. Start removing air from spare tyre. Once the tyre gets 15.6.5 Tyre Swap
learnt, vehicle alarm and hazard lamps flash 3 times to
indicate all the tyres were learnt. The infotainment screen
display is as below indicating all tyres were learnt
successfully.
If a tyre was swapped with the spare tyre, system alerts the user
through infotainment as below
TPMS warning lamp will continue to glow if the spare tyre is having
any pressure or temperature alert. Please note, if swapping is
done for more than one tyre or with the other running tyres,
system cannot identify the same and the system needs to be
relearned.
If any one of the running tyres goes faulty, spare tyre is swapped
with the running tyre and the vehicle is driven, then:
• the system automatically recognizes the swap
If there were any problem in learning, the alarm and hazard lamps
flash 4 times to indicate the tyre learning was not complete. • interchanges the running tyre and spare tyre data

WHEELS AND TYRES
15.6.6 Recommended Placard Value
Ambient Temp DEG C Recommended Prec Front & Rear

<0 28.0
10.0 29.1
20.0 30.6
30.0 32.0
40.0 33.5
50.0 34.9
60.0 36.4
If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 min & is
driven less than 15 min before filling the air then the tires shall
be filled to the respective placard as per the ambient
temperature else to the next placard value.
Example: if a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 deg c for 50
min and driven to a air filling station within 5 min then
respective play cared value will be 32.0 PSI for front & Rear.
Else 33.5 PSI.

EMERGENCIES
16 EMERGENCIES
16.1 Hazard Warning Flashers
16.2 Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks

Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.
If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly / intermittently
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, switch ON the
interior lamps.
3. If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the
The hazard warning flasher button is located in the central bezel starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak or discharged
switch bank. Press the button to turn ON the hazard warning battery. Try jumpstarting. Follow ‘jumpstarting’ instructions
flashers, all directional turn signals will flash to warn oncoming given later in this chapter.
traffic. This is an emergency warning system and should be used
4. Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and
only when there is an emergency. Use it when your vehicle is
Central Fuse Box.
disabled and is a safety hazard for other motorists. Hazard warning
flasher will work in all positions of the ignition key and even when the If the engine cranks normally, but does not start
vehicle is fully locked. 1. If the lamp illumination is normal, engine is cranking normally,
but the engine does not start even after repeated cranking, it
needs adjustment or repair. Contact an Authorised Mahindra
With extended use, the hazard warning flasher may drain your Dealer.
vehicle battery. 2. During winter, use non-winter diesel or due to extreme cold
conditions, the vehicle may not start. Contact an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.

EMERGENCIES
16.3 Vehicle Overheating

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine If the needle in the temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is
for more than 15 secs. at a time. Wait 10 to 15 secs. all the way up to the H and/or the high engine coolant temperature
before trying again. warning lamp is ON, your engine has overheated.
If the engine stalls while driving If the engine is getting overheated, the Engine Management System
Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine
cautiously off the road to a safe place. Turn ON your hazard warning OFF; it is dangerous to continue driving when the engine has
flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting
cluster. Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 secs. and to drive again.
try starting the engine again. If the vehicle still does not start, Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down:
contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
• Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop at the side of the road
If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the • Turn ON the hazard warning flashers
brakes will not work. Braking will be much harder than usual.
• Keep the engine running at idle
If the engine speed does not increase
• Engage the parking brake
If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is • Switch off the air-conditioner
depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management
System, electrical or electronic controls. In case of certain faults, • Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such
the engine may go to limp home mode, which is indicated by the that the needle in the temperature gauge is around halfway
check engine lamp. Have your vehicle checked by an Authorised between C and H
Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.

EMERGENCIES
Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/hood to Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually
visibly inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be cautious while inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system is
doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that under high pressure and temperature. Never open the
the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is maintained pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot. Not
between the 'Min' and 'Max' mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. taking precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.
Check for damages to heat exchangers and connecting hoses. Also
verify that the radiator shrouds, engine fan blades and the engine
belt all are in good condition.
For optimum performance of the cooling system, you must
If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest maintain the required coolant level and use only recommended
Authorised Mahindra Dealer for help. In case, no system leakage/ engine coolant.
failure is suspected, driving can be continued.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system 16.4 Jumpstarting
leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However, if the
engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating If your vehicle's battery has run down, you may be able to start the
conditions, get the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra engine by using a standalone booster battery or a vehicle with a
Dealer as soon as possible. good condition battery.
But before going ahead with this procedure ensure that the battery
is the cause of vehicle not starting. To confirm this, few simple tests
Refer to the 'High Engine Coolant Temperature' section under can be conducted as follows:
the 'Features and Control' chapter for details. • C h e c k t h e h e a d l i g h t s - Are they dim or bright? If they are dim, it's
likely your battery is dead. If your headlights are bright, you do not
have a dead battery and a jumpstart may not help.
If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored, the • T r y t o s t a r t y o u r v e h i c l e - Does it turn over very slowly, or does it
engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine components crank quickly? If it cranks quickly, you do not have a dead battery
from overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut- and a jumpstart may not help. If it cranks slowly, or not at all, you
off can lead to uncontrollable driving condition and accidents. probably have a dead battery.

EMERGENCIES
Open the bonnet and locate the battery (near the left side fender).
Identify the positive and negative terminals:
• The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will
usually have a R E D cable attached on it
• The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will
usually have a B L A C K cable attached to it
Check the physical condition of the battery. Inspect batteries for
cracks, leaks or any other damage. If you find any of these things, do
not jumpstart the vehicle. Call Mahindra Road Side Assistance or
replace the battery. If the weather is very cold, remove the refill
caps and check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or
like ice, do not attempt jumpstarting until it thaws. Don't let the vehicles touch each other.
1. Park the working vehicle near the disabled vehicle. Park the 2. Wear safety gear (goggles or face guard and gloves) if you
vehicle in such a way that the distance between both vehicle have it.
batteries is as small as practical. Turn off the engine, radio,
lights, A/C, fans and all other electrical components. Make
sure that all of these things are OFF in the disabled vehicle, too

EMERGENCIES
spark when you connect to a good ground. As a last resort,

you may connect to the negative (-) post of the dead battery,
It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s but this risks igniting hydrogen gas coming off the battery
battery cables from the battery terminals and clean both
cables and terminals. Use a stiff wire brush to remove all
corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the battery terminals
and jump the vehicle.
3. Untangle and unwind your jumper cables. Like your batteries,
your jumper cables will probably have red and black cables and
will have heavy duty clamps to connect to the battery
terminals. You must make sure that the red and black ends of
your jumper cables never touch each other once they are
connected to the batteries; permitting them to do so can
result in serious arcing and/or damage to one or both
vehicles.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the order described below:
Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine
• Connect one red clamp to the positive (+) terminal of the compartment, where they could be exposed to moving
dead battery/disabled vehicle parts.
• Connect the other red clamp to the positive (+) terminal of 5. Start the working vehicle. Let it idle for a few minutes. Rev the
the good battery engine a little above idle for 30 to 60 secs.. You do this to
charge the battery in the dead vehicle. A good clean
• Connect one black clamp to the negative (-) terminal of the connection between the battery cables and the battery
good battery terminals is essential.
• Connect the other black clamp to a piece of grounded metal 6. Try to start the disabled vehicle. If it does not start, shut the
on the dead vehicle, preferably shiny metal (not painted or engine off and disconnect the last connection temporarily while
oily) that is attached to the engine. Usually a nut, bolt or you slightly twist or wiggle each of the four clamps to help
other protruding shiny metal will work. You may see a small ensure a good electrical connection. Restart the working

EMERGENCIES
vehicle again. Allow another 5 minutes for charging before

attempting to start the disabled vehicle. If this does not work
after a few tries, you may need to have the vehicle towed or Improper jumpstarting procedures can result in battery
the battery replaced. explosion and acid burn hazard.
7. Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do this in Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic
the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don't control units.
let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle To disconnect battery terminals, wait for at least 2 minutes to
into the engine compartment) allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal
• Disconnect the black clamp from the grounded metal on injury.
the dead vehicle While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first
• Disconnect the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.
the good battery Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will
lead to alternator failure.
• Disconnect the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery
• Disconnect the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being
the dead battery towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing the
Replace any positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable tow vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.
(You have had to remove or open these in the beginning) Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should
These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the not be jumpstarted without ‘protected’ jumpstarter leads. It is
battery. necessary to refer to the owner's handbook for jumpstarting
8. Keep the recently-disabled vehicle's engine running. Run the procedures for such vehicles.
vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the
accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to
start the vehicle again. If it does not, you probably have a dead
battery or a dying alternator.

EMERGENCIES
16.5 Limp Home Mode 16.6 Towing
Limp Home Mode is an emergency situation declared by the EMS Front Tow Hook
(Engine Management System) due to failure of one/more critical
sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management
System) will revert back to basic minimum requirement (fuel
quantity/injection timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle back
to the nearest workshop. Needless to say, the drivability & fuel
consumption will be greatly affected.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle
performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine
management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home
Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp
illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle
speed is limited and the accelerator pedal may not function
normally. It is recommended you contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer immediately for assistance.

EMERGENCIES
16.6.1 Towing Equipment
Variant
Towing Options
2WD
Front Tow hook 
Flatbed towing 
Towing by all 4 wheels 
Sling type towing (front wheel lift) Not recommended
Towing equipment are of two types:

• S l i n g - t y p e e q u i p m e n t - The tow truck uses metal cables with
hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame
or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground. This
is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle's
suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type equipment
• F l a t - b e d e q u i p m e n t - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a truck.
This is the safest and best way of towing

MAINTENANCE
17 MAINTENANCE Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance
Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get the
17.1 General Owner's Information
performance, dependability, long life and better resale value you
expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we've put together this
Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance
Maintenance Section. It outlines the services required to properly
requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-
focus is on maintaining your vehicle while it's running great, which
day care is more important to ensure a smooth, trouble-free, safe
goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses
and economical operation.
later.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified
Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine
maintenance, including general maintenance service is performed.
maintenance:
Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission
control system limited warranties specify that proper maintenance • Familiarise yourself with your vehicle by going through your
and care must be performed. See Service Coupon Booklet for Owner's Manual
complete warranty information.
• Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section
Where to go for service?
• Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled
Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to maintenance in the Service Coupon Booklet
date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, • Consult with your Authorised Mahindra Dealer for all your
service tips and in dealership training programmes. They learn to vehicle's needs
work on Mahindra vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Authorised Mahindra Dealer service
department does the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle reliably and economically.

MAINTENANCE
17.1.1 Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your If an Authorised Mahindra Dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
Vehicle you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They
would need the following information:
Prepare for the Appointment
Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and
If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right office), Authorised Mahindra Dealer name, Vehicle Identification
papers with you. All work to be performed may not be covered by Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history.
17.1.3 Warranty Information
Prepare a List
Read the Warranty Information given in the ‘ W a r r a n t y I n f o r m a t i o n
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work & M a i n t e n a n c e G u i d e ’ for the terms and provisions of Mahindra
you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids,
your maintenance log, let the service adviser know about it. lubricants and accessories are available at any Authorised
Mahindra Dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its
Be Reasonable with Requests
best.
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the
end of the day, discuss the situation with the service adviser and list 17.1.4 Protect your Warranty
the items in order of priority.
Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your
17.1.2 Need Assistance? vehicle performing as intended, it's also the best way to protect
your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified
It is recommended talking to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer in the Service Coupon Booklet will invalidate warranty coverage on
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can't stress enough
process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the how important it is to keep records of all maintenance. Damage or
general manager or owner of the dealership. failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not
covered under warranty.

MAINTENANCE
Keeping m a i n t e n a n c e r e c o r d s is easy with the service coupon recommends against the use of such additive products unless
booklet specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.
It's important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
your convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems
maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. using different specifications and performance features. That's why
Every time you bring your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance, be it's important to rely on your Authorised Mahindra Dealer to
sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
date of service and mileage at the time of service. This will make
record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty When planning your maintenance services, consider your
coverage, you will have all the documentation to show you've Authorised Mahindra Dealer for all your vehicle's needs.
properly maintained it.
17.1.7 Get the most from your Service and Maintenance
17.1.5 Oils, Fluids and Flushing visits
In many cases, fluid discolouration is a normal operating Getting your vehicle serviced at an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence, it is
or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discoloured fluids recommended to service your vehicle at an Authorised Mahindra
that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material Dealer only.
contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert
such as the factory trained technicians at your Authorised 17.1.8 Maintenance Interval
Mahindra Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at
the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance intervals based
upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate
17.1.6 Chemicals and Additives mileage to perform the various maintenance services. This protects
your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you. Mahindra
Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not required for recommends that you do not deviate from the maintenance
factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra schedules presented in this Maintenance Schedule.

MAINTENANCE
17.1.9 Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions 17.2 Opening and Closing the Hood
• Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting The hood release lever is located in the driver side footwell area,
below the instrument panel. To open hood follow the steps below:
• Set the parking brake
1. Pull the lever below the driver side instrument panel to release
• Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving the hood.
unexpectedly
• Turn OFF the engine and remove the key
• Stay clear of hot vehicle parts
• Avoid repeated contact with fluids
• Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and
hot vehicle parts
• Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes
away from the battery and all fuel-related parts
2. Lift the hood a little to access the safety latch holding the hood
striker. This safety latch is located below the hood at the
Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral parts centre.
are removed.

MAINTENANCE
3. Lift the safety latch and lift the hood. • Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position,
as vision is obstructed
To close the hood, follow the below steps:
1. Remove the stay rod supporting the hood by slightly lifting the
hood
2. Bring the hood near to its self-opening/closing position
3. Now, push the hood to close and ensure the primary latch is
engaged
4. Hood is supported by a stay rod. Lift the safety latch and lift the
hood. 4. Before driving off, check hood is locked properly with primary
latch fully engaged
Bonnet Open Hazard - When the bonnet is open and vehicle is

in unlock condition:
• Hazard lamps flash continuously to alert the user that the
bonnet is open
• Hazard cluster telltale also flashes
• Do not open the hood immediately after a drive; the engine To stop the warning, do any one of the following:
compartment will be very hot
— Close the bonnet
• Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the — Press the hazard button TWICE
hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, resulting in an accident — Change the turn signal stalk position
— Drive the vehicle > 10 kmph

MAINTENANCE
17.3 Engine Compartment

Diesel
A Front Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir E Dipstick

B Degassing Tank F Air Filter
C Engine Oil Cap G Battery
D Brake Fluid Reservoir H Engine Compartment Fuse Box

MAINTENANCE
Petrol
A Front Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir E Dipstick

B Degassing Tank F Air Filter
C Engine Oil Cap G Battery
D Brake Fluid Reservoir H Engine Compartment Fuse Box

MAINTENANCE
Maintenance is classified as below:

• General Maintenance
• Scheduled Maintenance
17.4 General Maintenance • Brake/Clutch fluid level

• Engine oil level
• Fluid leaks
Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine is
ON. • Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities
Inside the Vehicle
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, • Lights
if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you
• Warning lamps
should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Authorised
Mahindra Dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. • Windshield wipe and wash
• Steering wheel
• Seats
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you intend
to run the engine. • Seat belts
In the Engine Compartment • Accelerator pedal
• Front windshield washer fluid level • Brake pedal
• Engine coolant level • Brakes
• Battery condition • Parking brake
• Gear lever shift mechanism

MAINTENANCE
Outside the Vehicle 17.5.3 Engine Oil Consumption

• Lamps
It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during
• Fluid leaks operation.
• Doors and engine hood latches Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows:
• Tyre inflation pressure • Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin
films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked
• Tyre surface/thread and wheel nuts
into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure
generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in
17.5 In the Engine Compartment the combustion chamber
• Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of
17.5.1 Fluid Leaks this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the
intake air and is burnt there
Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle
for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapour or notice any leak, have the • Engine oil consumption depends on the operating conditions in
cause found and corrected immediately. which the vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to
high speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A
new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston rings
17.5.2 Engine Oil and cylinder walls are not conditioned
Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the
inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining the engine 17.5.4 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil
in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the
engine oil regularly. • Make sure the vehicle is on level ground
• Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for the oil to settle
down into the oil sump
• Apply the parking brake

MAINTENANCE
• Open the hood, use stay rod to support the hood. Protect Diesel
yourself from engine heat
• Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick
• Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then
remove it again
• If the oil level is between “M i n ” and “M a x ” marks, the oil level is
acceptable. D O N O T A D D O I L
• If the oil level is below or near the “Min” mark, add enough oil
through the oil filler cap to raise the level within the “Min” and
“Max” marks. Wait for few minutes after every top-up for the oil
to settle down before checking the level • Oil levels above the “Max” mark may cause engine damage/poor
performance
Petrol
• Put the dipstick and the oil filler cap back and ensure it is fully/
properly seated
Petrol

MAINTENANCE
Diesel 17.5.5 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level
• Park the vehicle on flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking

brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine
To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, DO
NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and/or • Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature
the engine oil filler cap removed. comes down to normal room temperature
• The coolant level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marking
provided on the degassing tank
Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by an
Authorised Mahindra Dealer. • In case the coolant level is below the “MIN” marking, the coolant
should be topped-up
• The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the “MIN” but
remain below the “MAX” marking on the degassing tank
• However, if the degassing tank is found to be near empty, it is
recommended that the system be checked at an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer

MAINTENANCE
The brake and clutch systems are supplied fluid from the same
reservoir.
Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot
coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise
severe burns by the erupting liquid. when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the
“MIN” and “MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there
is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are below the “MIN” mark,
the performance of the systems could be compromised; the brake/
Top-up only with recommended Ready To Use (RTU) coolants clutch operation could be spongy and gear change harder. Top-up
for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion the recommended brake/clutch fluid till the “MAX” mark or contact
protection. Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brand an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
of coolants is not recommended and should be avoided.
Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it and be
sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the reservoir open
for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.
Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be done
by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer. Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.
Refer to ‘Lubricant and Capacities’ section.
17.5.6 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid
Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done by an

Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

MAINTENANCE
17.5.7 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up 17.6 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle
17.6.1 Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights
and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.
17.6.2 Warning Messages and Lamps

Check all warning lamps appearing in the instrument cluster and
DDAS. Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further
details.
Top-up windshield washer reservoirs as and when required.
The windshield washer tank is located next to the right side head 17.6.3 Seats
lamp in the engine bay. It supplies fluid to both front and rear
washer. Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back
recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in
In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down
premixed with anti-freeze. smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
17.6.4 Seat Belts

If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 4.5ºC, use
washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and
fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
accident.

MAINTENANCE
17.6.5 Accelerator Pedal 17.7.3 Doors and Engine Hood
Check the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper
stickiness. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any. functioning. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures
the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
17.6.6 Brake Pedal
17.7.4 Tyre Inflation Pressure
Check the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check
the foot well and remove obstructions, if any. Check the Tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week.
17.7 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle 17.8 Battery
The following checks should be carried out from time to time, Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra genuine battery. For
unless otherwise specified. longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly
fastened to the battery terminals.
17.7.1 Lamps
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the
Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior lamps. cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To prevent
corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten
loose terminals and hold down clamp nuts only enough to keep the
17.7.2 Fluid Leaks
battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the
battery terminals.
Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle
for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapour or notice any leak, have the
cause found and corrected immediately.

MAINTENANCE
17.8.1 For Best Battery Service
• Keep the battery securely mounted Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery
acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery
• Keep the battery top clean and dry when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight and coated with other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush
petroleum jelly or terminal grease contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and
solution of water and baking soda explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
components. Wash hands after handling batteries.
Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is running.
This will adversely affect all electronic controllers. If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been
installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if
equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative The replacement battery must meet the specification of the
terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the originally fitted battery.
negative terminal is connected last.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be 17.9 Wiper Blades
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
an extended period of time. This will minimise the discharge of your Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for
battery during storage. inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft
sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is
worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging, get it replaced at an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer.

MAINTENANCE
17.9.1 Changing the Wiper Blade 3. Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are free of
the metal support.
1. Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right angles to the 4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then instal the blade
wiper arm. assembly in the reverse order of removal.
To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm

slap down on to it.
17.10 Appearance Care and Protection
17.10.1 Washing the Exterior
2. Press the retaining clip in the opposite direction, disengage the • Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a
wiper blade and pull it off the arm. neutral pH soap
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish
washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolour and spot
painted surfaces
• Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during
exposure to strong, direct sunlight
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water
for best results
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order
to eliminate water spotting

MAINTENANCE
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the 17.10.3 Exterior Chrome
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and
cause damage to the vehicle • Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a
neutral pH shampoo
• Immediately remove items such as Petrol, diesel fuel, bird
droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the • Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your
vehicle's paint work and trim over time Authorised Mahindra Dealer. Apply the product as you would
wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag
17.10.2 Engine Compartment
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface
• After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of
Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Authorised Mahindra
Dealer, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from
environmental effects
17.10.4 Paint Chips
• Authorised Mahindra Dealers have the exact touch-up paint to

match your vehicle's colour
• Take your vehicle to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for paint
Do not wash the engine or engine compartment with touch-up or paint repairs
pressurised water.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect
deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before
repairing paint chips
• Always read the instructions before using the products

MAINTENANCE
17.10.5 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Covers (if equipped) 17.10.7 Windows and Wiper Blades
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of paint The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades
finish. In order to maintain their shine: should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly,
substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the
• Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available at
cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial
your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or
thoroughly with a strong stream of water
chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and smearing of the
• Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims windshield.
or covers
To clean these items follow these tips:
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents • The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned
with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner,
available at your Authorised Mahindra Dealer
17.10.6 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Authorised
are available with your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. You can use Mahindra Dealer. This washer fluid contains a special solution in
these cleaners: addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on
the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades
• For routine cleaning of plastic parts when they appear worn or do not function properly
• For tar or grease spots • Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches
• For plastic head lamp lenses • Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass
parts
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass
cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean
the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a

MAINTENANCE
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the
cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not
• Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth
form when you rinse the windshield with water.
• Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals,
as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid • Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth
lines (if equipped). onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature
for 30 minutes
17.10.8 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim and Cluster • Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this
Lens cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 secs.
• Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when 17.10.9 Interior Maintenance
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens
with soap and water using soft microfibre / cotton cloth / sponge, • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner
then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash • Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner
and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper first with a stain remover
portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps
protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection • Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which
can stain and discolour the fabric and affect the flame retardant
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage abilities of the seat materials
the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens
• Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing

MAINTENANCE
17.10.10 Leather Seats (if equipped) 17.11 Air-Conditioning System Maintenance
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major
the leather: maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified
technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make
• To clean, use a soft microfibre/cotton / sponge cloth with a
sure the air-conditioning works efficiently.
leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft
cloth Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during
• To help maintain its resiliency and colour, use the leather care the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes with the
kit, available from an Authorised Mahindra Dealer engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates
the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions,
solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or
oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may
cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make
sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system.
This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the
refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the
In some instances, a colour or dye transfer can occur when wet environment.
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs,
clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.
17.12 Vehicle Storage
17.10.11 Underbody If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks, you may want
to take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the negative
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it
and door drain holes free from packed dirt. You can also use an out of service (i. e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air-
anti-corrosion spray for the underbody to avoid rusting and conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
corrosion especially for vehicles in coastal places. mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate

MAINTENANCE
system lubrication to minimise the possibility of compressor Do not:

damage when the system is started again.
• Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a good place
It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well to start scraping. You could end up cracking more than the ice
levelled, ventilated and closed place. and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/window
• Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will
17.13 Winter Care crack your windshield
17.13.1 Dealing with Ice 17.13.3 During Winter Storage

Make sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks. Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in
When you're stuck, having a small shovel is useful to dig out of the mind:
snow. The weight of a bag of sand in the trunk will give added
traction in rear-wheel drive vehicles and can be used to sprinkle on • Run it in a well-ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up
the snow and ice to gain better traction. And don't forget personal quickly
protection such as a warm coat, hat, gloves and a blanket, in case • Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to come
you get stuck in a storm. up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to
circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your
17.13.2 Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank radiator anti-freeze circulates as well
• Start up the air-conditioner and/or heater and run both for 10
Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A minutes or so. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of
sudden storm with unexpected heavy rains could leave you the system
stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle
the engine from time to time to keep warm.
17.13.4 Exterior
Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer of protection to
your paint.

MAINTENANCE
17.13.5 Vinyl and Rubber 17.14 Bulb Replacements
Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from 17.14.1 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement
drying out.
17.13.6 Interior
Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to
see what's there, clean the upholstery in all nooks and corners.
17.13.7 Engine
Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything is in good

condition and replace any that need to be. The last thing to do is to
make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated
and don't corrode.
If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-use,

warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes before
driving the vehicle.

MAINTENANCE
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination
will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with
any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
To avoid burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs when

they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurised gas inside and
are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause
the bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic
holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
The head lamp bulb can be replaced without removing the head
lamp assembly from the vehicle. Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is
illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
To replace the head lamp bulb: Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally
• Ensure ignition is switched OFF fitted bulbs.
• Remove rear dust cover from the head lamp
• Remove the bulb assembly with connector from the head lamp
by unlocking the wire clamp
• Detach the bulb assembly from the wiring connector near to the
head lamp
• Insert the connector into the new bulb (of the same wattage),
and follow the reverse procedure to assemble the bulb assembly
in the headlight assembly
• Clamp the bulb assembly by wire clamp properly

MAINTENANCE
17.15 Projector Head Lamp (if equipped)

To avoid burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs when
they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurised gas inside and
are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause
the bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic
holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is

illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally
fitted bulbs.
A Turn signal lamp C Headlamp (High beam)
B Tail lamp/(DRL) D Headlamp (Low beam) 17.16 Service Reminder Alert (if equipped)
Service reminder alert will be displayed in instrument cluster

indicating that the next scheduled service is due. Alert will be active
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination when ignition is turned ON before 200 km of every service
will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with schedule.
any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Alert will be reset by Mahindra Authorised Service Dealer after
completion of every service.

MAINTENANCE
17.17 Maintenance Schedule Chart (Petrol)
XUV300 – PETROL Distance Covered in km x 1000

FREE SERVICE PAID SERVICE
Description Change Interval
1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
ENGINE
ENGINE OIL 1 Replace at every 10000 km I R R R R R R R R R R
ENGINE OIL FILTER Replace at every 10000 km R R R R R R R R R R
AUTO TENSIONER & BELTS Replace at every 100000 km I I R
Replace at first 60000 km and then I I I I I I R I I I I

COOLANT 3 at every 80000 km
SPARK PLUGS 3 Replace at every 100000 km R
AIR, FUEL & EXHAUST

Check indicator at every 10000 km & C C R C C R C C R C
AIR FILTER ELEMENT 4 Replace element at every 30000 km
FUEL FILTER Replace at every 20000 km R R R R R
EXHAUST PIPE MOUNTINGS Inspect at 1000, 20000 km and then I I I I I I

& DAMAGE/LEAKAGE at every 20000 km
TRANSAXLE & DIFFERENTIAL
Replace at first 50000 km & at I R I
TRANSAXLE OIL 3 subsequent 100000 km

MAINTENANCE

1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
BRAKES
BRAKE & CLUTCH FLUID- Replace at every 40000 km I I I I R I I I R I I
LEVEL CHECK 2
Adjust at 1000, 20000 km and then A A A A A A
PARKING BRAKE OPERATION at every 20000 km
FRONT AND REAR BRAKE I I I I I I I I I I
Inspect at every 10000 km
PADS / CALIPER
STEERING
WHEEL ALIGNMENT* At 40000 km, earlier if abnormal wear is noticed @
TYRE ROTATION* Inspect at every 10000 km I I I I I I I I I I
WHEEL BALANCING* If Required

ELECTRICAL
BATTERY HEALTH CHECK Inspect at every 10000 km I I I I I I I I I I
ALL LAMPS, HORNS, WIPERS Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I

& WASHERS
SERVICE REMINDER Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
INDICATOR RESET
HEAD LIGHT AIMING Inspect at 1000 km I

MAINTENANCE

1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
HVAC
PARTICLE FILTER Replace at every 10000 km R R R R R R R R R R
WATER DRAIN PIPE Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
FINAL INSPECTION
TYRE PRESSURE Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
BALL JOINTS/DRIVE SHAFT Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
BOOTS GREASE LEAK
ROAD TEST Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
CHECK DTC Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I

LEGENDS -
I = Inspect and Correct R = Replace C =Clean A= Adjust
* ON Chargeable Basis, # - If Applicable,
1 - Change as per Km or 1 Year whichever earlier
For Petrol engine, if the vehicle operates in dusty environment, high humid and predominant city drive condition oil change at every 5000 km or 1 year
whichever earlier
2 - Change as per the km or 2 years whichever earlier
3 - Change as per the km or 3 years whichever earlier
4 - Under extreme operating conditions, replace air filter every 20,000 km
@ - Suggest to carry Wheel Alignment at Mahindra Authorised Service Centre

MAINTENANCE
17.18 Maintenance Schedule Chart (Diesel)
XUV300 – DIESEL Distance Covered in km x 1000

1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
ENGINE
Replace at first 10000 km then I R I R I R I R I R I
ENGINE OIL 1 every 20000 km
Replace at first 10000 km then R R R R R
ENGINE OIL FILTER every 20000 km
AUTO TENSIONER & BELTS Replace at every 100000 km I I R
Replace at first 60000 km and then I I I I I I R I I I I

COOLANT 3 at every 80000 km
AIR, FUEL & EXHAUST
Check indicator at every 10000 km
AIR FILTER ELEMENT 4 & Replace element at every 30000 C C R C C R C C R C
km
FUEL FILTER Replace at every 40000 km R R
DRAIN WATER IN FUEL Inspect at every 10000 km I I I I I I I I I
FILTER
EXHAUST PIPE MOUNTINGS Inspect at 1000, 20000 km and I I I I I I
& DAMAGE/LEAKAGE then at every 20000 km

MAINTENANCE

1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
TRANSAXLE & DIFFERENTIAL
Replace at first 50000 km & at I R I
TRANSAXLE OIL 3 subsequent 100000 km
BRAKES
BRAKE & CLUTCH FLUID- Replace at every 40000 km I I I I R I I I R I I
LEVEL CHECK 2
Adjust at 1000, 20000 km and then A A A A A A
PARKING BRAKE OPERATION at every 20000 km
FRONT AND REAR BRAKE I I I I I I I I I I
Inspect at every 10000 km
PADS / CALIPER
STEERING
WHEEL ALIGNMENT* At 40000 km, earlier if abnormal wear is noticed @
TYRE ROTATION* Inspect at every 10000 km I I I I I I I I I I
WHEEL BALANCING* If Required

ELECTRICAL
BATTERY HEALTH CHECK Inspect at every 10000 km I I I I I I I I I I
ALL LAMPS, HORNS, WIPERS Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I

& WASHERS

MAINTENANCE

1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
SERVICE REMINDER Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
INDICATOR RESET
HEAD LIGHT AIMING Inspect at 1000 km I
HVAC
PARTICLE FILTER Replace at every 10000 km R R R R R R R R R R
WATER DRAIN PIPE Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I

FINAL INSPECTION
TYRE PRESSURE Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
BALL JOINTS/DRIVE SHAFT Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
BOOTS GREASE LEAK
ROAD TEST Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I
CHECK DTC Inspect at every service I I I I I I I I I I I

LEGENDS -
I = Inspect and Correct R = Replace C =Clean A= Adjust
* ON Chargeable Basis, # - If Applicable,
1- Change as per the km or 1 year whichever earlier 2 - Change as per the km or 2 years whichever earlier
3 - Change as per the km or 3 years whichever earlier 4 - Under extreme operating conditions, replace air filter every 20,000 km
@ - Suggest to carry Wheel Alignment at Mahindra Authorised Service Centre

Alphabetical Index
A Battery Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Bottle Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Door Open Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
After Driving Off-Road or through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Drive Information (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Air-Conditioning System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20 Bulb Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-22 Drive Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Airbag Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Bulb Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Driving and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Airbag Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Driving Through Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Airbag Inflation/Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Dual Zone Automatic Heater and A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-17
Airbag Non-deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Dual Zone Automatic Heater and A/C (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Airbag Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Airbag Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
C
Airbag System Malfunction Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Central Locking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Airbag Warning Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Centre Room Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Alloy Wheels and Wheel Covers (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18
Centre Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Centre Switch Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
E
Anti Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Changing a flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Electric Foldable ORVM (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Anti-Glare Auto Adjustment Function (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Changing a Flat Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 Electric ORVM (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Changing the Wiper Blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-16 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . 9-25 Check Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-14
Appearance Care and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-16 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12 Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6, 17-17
Arming of Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-11 Engine Compartment Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Assist Grip and Coat Hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Audio/Infotainment Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Chemicals and Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 Engine Idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Auto Hazard Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Child Restraint and Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Engine Idling - In Cold Weather. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16
Auto Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Clock Screens (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Engine Immobiliser System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Auto Mode (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Cluster Setting (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Engine Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Auto Operation Mode (Auto Indicator ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Console Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Engine Stop/Start Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Auto Re-lock On Any Door Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16 Entry and Exit Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Auto Re-lock on Master Actuator Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Cruise Control Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17 EPS Warning Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Auto Re-locking (if applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Cruise Control De-activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17 ESP OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Auto Unlock On Ignition OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Cruise Indicator (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 ESP OFF Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Auto Unlock Upon Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 ESP ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-14
AUTO Wash (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 ESP System Warning Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
AUX and USB Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Exhaust Gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Exterior Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-17
Average Speed (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 D Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Dealing with Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-21
Defogging/Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-17
B Digital Speedo Meter (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
F
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-14 Distance to Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Fastening the Seat Belt (3-Point type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Battery Charging System Warning Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Door Ajar Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Feature Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Battery Replacement for Remote Key/Smart Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Door Courtesy Lamp (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Feature Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Alphabetical Index
Flick-Wipe (Mist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Glow Plug Indicator (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Intermittent (INT) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Flowing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Fog Lamps (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Fog Lamps OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Folding The Rear Seat Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Follow-Me Home (FMH) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
H J
Front Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Front Center Vent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Hazard Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Jack Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Front Cup Holder/Rear Cup Holder and Armrest (if equipped). . . . . . . 8-13 Head Lamp “AUTO” Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Front Fog Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Head Lamp / High Beam Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Front Fog Lamps ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-22
Front Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Head Lamp Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Front Roof Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Head Lamp Levelling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Front Seat Height Adjustment (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Head Lamp Low/High Beam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Front Seat Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Front Seat Slide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Head Lamp ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
K
Front Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-21
Front Side Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 HHC malfunction (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Front/Rear Obstacle Detection System (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-19 High Speed Wiping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Fuel Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Fuel Level Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20
How to Calculate Fuel Efficiency (Mileage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
HVAC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
L
Fuelling during Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-19 Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV) (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Functional Safety Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Leather Seats (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20
Fuses & Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Life of Tyre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Lighting Control Stalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
I Limitations of PAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
If Remote Key is Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Locks and Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
G If Smart Key is Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Ignition Switch (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Low Fuel Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Gear Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Low Speed Wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Gear Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11 Infant and Child Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Lubricants & Fuel Recommendation Chart - Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Gear Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Inflating Your Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 Lubricants & Fuel Recommendation Chart - Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Gears 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-12 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
General Driving Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Luggage Room Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
General Owners Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Instrument Panel Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
General Safety Information and Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
General Warnings and Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim and Cluster Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-19
Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Interior Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-19
M
Glove Box Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Interior Rearview Mirror (IRVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-13
Alphabetical Index
Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-14 Parking Assistance System Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Replacing Air Conditioner Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
Maintenance Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Restore the Tools, Jack and Flat Tyre Securely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Maintenance Schedule Chart (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-28 Parking Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 RESUME Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
Maintenance Schedule Chart (Petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-25 Parking Lamp ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13
Manual Heater/Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18 Parking on a Hill/Incline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) - Type-2 (if
Manual Operation Mode (Auto Indicator OFF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 PAS (RPAS & FPAS) Information on Instrument Cluster Screen . . . . . 10-3 equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Manual ORVM (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) – Type 1(if
Manual Temperature Control (MTC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Manual Type (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Passenger Seat Head Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Passenger Seat Recline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Minimum Fuel Requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 Passenger Seat Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Pay Attention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Mood Lighting (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18
Power Outlet (12V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
S
Power Window Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Safety Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Protect your Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Screen View Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
N Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Seat Back/Magazine Pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Need Assistance?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Seat Belt Height Adjuster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Neutral Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11 Seat Belt Warning Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Q Seat Side Airbag and Curtain Airbag (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Self Removing SRS Related Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Quadruple Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 SET - Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
SET+ Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
O Sitting in Correct Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Smart Key Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
OBD Check Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Smart Key Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Off-Road Driving Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
R Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch (applicable for driver
door only) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Oils, Fluids and Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 Radial Ply Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Operation of PAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Rear Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Spare Wheel Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Operation of RPAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Operation of TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 Rear Fog Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Starting the Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Rear Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Override Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-19 Rear Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Steering Audio Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
REAR VIEW CAMERA (RVC) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Steering Controls - Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Rear Wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Steering Lock Alerts (for W8/W8 (O) only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Rear Wiper-High Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Steering Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Rear Wiper-Low Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Steering Mode Control Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
P Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-12
Recommended Placard Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-13
Steering Mode Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Stopping the Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Paint Chips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-17 Remote Key Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Storage Compartments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7, 8-10
Park Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Remote key Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Parking Assistance System (PAS) – RPAS & FPAS (If equipped) . . . . . 10-2 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Sun Glass Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Alphabetical Index
Sun Visor and Ticket Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Uphill and Downhill Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Sunroof (if equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Sunroof Service Checking Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Sunroof Sliding Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Sunroof Tilting Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
V
Vanity Mirror and Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Vehicle Condition Related Warning (W8/W8 (O) only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
T Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Vehicle Overheating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Tailgate Safety Release Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
Theft Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Theft Detent Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Theft Detent Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Tilt Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Tips for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
W
Tiretronics (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27, 15-8 W4/W6 instrument cluster screen flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Tiretronics Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10 W8/W8(O) Instrument Cluster screen flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Tiretronics Learning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Tiretronics Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 Warning for Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
To Owners of a Mahindra Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Warning Lamps Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7 Warning Triangle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Towing Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11 Washing the Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-16
Tread Wear Indicators (TWI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Trip Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Welcome and Good Bye Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Turn Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Wheel Bolt Loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Wheel Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Windows and Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18
Tyre Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-13
Tyre Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6 Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Tyre Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-12 Windshield Wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Winter Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-21
Wipe/Wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-15
Wiper Control Stalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
U Wiper Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Underbody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20
Unfastening the Seat Belt (Both 3-Point & 2-Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

XUV300 Owners Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

XUV300 Owners Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Owner’s Manual

1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................ 1-1 Front Overview........................................................................ 3-1

Airbag Inflation/Deployment .............................................. 6-6 Theft Detent Warning System......................................... 7-24

Speedometer .......................................................................... 9-2 Smart Key Alerts ................................................................ 9-19

Engine Idling .......................................................................14-15 Opening and Closing the Hood......................................... 17-4

1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 1-1

To emphasise information and procedures regarding safety, use,

1.3 General Safety Information and Instructions

1-2 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 1-3

1-4 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

If you have any questions concerning the proper use or

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 1-5

1-6 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-1

2-2 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-3

2-4 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-5

2.2 Lubricants & Fuel Recommendation Chart - Petrol

2-6 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

2.3 Lubricants & Fuel Recommendation Chart - Diesel

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-7

2.4 Dimensions 2.4.2 Rear View

Dimension & Weights mm

2.4.1 Front View

2-8 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

2.5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2.6 Engine Number

Engine Number is punched on the engine crank case adjacent to

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-9

2.7 Bulb Specification

Lamp Bulb Wattage Bulb Type No. of Bulbs per Vehicle

Headlamp High version – High beam H1 55W 12V 55W 2

Headlamp High version – Low beam H7 55W 12V 55W 2

Headlamp Low version High/Low beam H4 55/60W 12V 55/60W 2

Front position lamp – High version LEDs

Front position lamp – Low version W5W 12V 5W 2

Turn signal lamp – Front P21W 12V 21W 2

Front Fog lamp H16 19W 12V 19W 2

Side Turn signal lamp – Low version WY5W 12V 5W 2

Stop lamp LEDs

Rear position lamp LEDs

Turn signal lamp – Rear WY16W 12V 16W 2

Reverse lamp W16W 12V 16W 2

Rear Fog lamp P21W 12V 21W 2

2-10 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

2.8 Fuses & Relays

A fuse is the most common electric protection device. A fuse is

You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-11

2-12 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-13

2.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Fuse Layout :

2-14 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-15

2.9 Changing a Flat Tyre

2-16 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019

The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 012019 2-17

• Take the jack out from the tool kit organiser

2.9.3 Spare Wheel Removal

The spare wheel is mounted below the luggage compartment at the